Sharp MX-m260 MX-m310 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL

CODE: 00ZMXM310/S1E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM

MODEL
MX-M260/M310
MX-M260N/M310N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Parts marked with are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[5] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
1. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
2. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
2. Details of adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

4. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Line of machines and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
2. Combination of options list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
[6] SIMULATION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
2. Simulation code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
2. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
[8] MAINTENANCE
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
2. Details of Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
3. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 31
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

5. Environment conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
3. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
4. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
5. Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
6. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
7. Solenoid/Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
8. Drive motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
9. Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
10. Fan/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
11. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
12. Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE

1. Firmware update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
2. Actual wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3
3. Signal list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
NOTE FOR SERVICING

This Service Manual uses some photographs to assure safe operation.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious danger
to life or a serious injury may result.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, injury or damage
to property could result.
2. Precautions for servicing

1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except
when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use extreme
care when servicing.
1. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric shock.
2) If there is any abnormality such as smoke or an abnormal smell,
interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
3) Be sure the machine is properly grounded. Failure to ground the
machine properly may result in an electric shock or fire.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, grounding must be made.
4) When connecting the ground wire, never connect it to the following
points as it may cause an explosion, fire, or an electric shock:
Gas tube
Lightning conductor
A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
Grounding wire for telephone line
5) Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord. Do not put heavy
objects on the power cord. Do not bend or pull the cord forcefully. It
may cause a fire or electric shock.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which may
drop inside the machine.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may

cause an electric shock . Be careful when servicing.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
5) When servicing the machine while operating, be careful not to
make contact with chains, belts, gear, and any other moving parts.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside
the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with water
immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to damage fingers when servicing.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner
may pop and burn you.
10) When replacing the lithium battery on the PWB, use only the specified battery. If a battery of different specification is used, it may not
be compatible and cause breakdown or malfunction of the
machine.
11) When carrying an electric unit or a PWB, use an anti-static (electricity) bag. Failure to do so may cause component failure or
machine malfunction.

8) Do not touch the power plug, insert a telephone jack, perform service or operate the machine with wet or oil hands. It may cause an
electric shock.
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i
3. Note for installing site

Do not install the machine at the following sites.
1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low
humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature and
humidity.
Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, causing
paper jam or copy dirt.
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
described later.
2) Place of much vibrations
It may cause a breakdown.
3) Poorly ventilated place
An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it.
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as not
to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a
machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the machine in a
well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
4) Place of direct sunlight.
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may undergo
qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium
The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine may
undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result in
dirt copy.
6) Place of much dust
When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or copy
dirt.
7) Place near a wall
Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy dirt or
a breakdown may be resulted.
8) Unstable or slant surface
If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified, it is
recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.
4. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU

When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following items.
1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the
power plug from the power outlet.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures
described in this Service Manual.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all the
parts including the cover installed and perform the operation
check.
4) Do not modify the LSU.
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the operation
check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes.
If the above precaution is neglected or an undesignated work is performed, safety may not be assured.
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

1. Line of machines and options
Document cover
[MX-VR10]
Reversing single pass feeder

[MX-RP10]
Job separator tray

[MX-TR11]
[RSPF]
Staple cartridge
[MX-SCX1]
Finisher
[MX-FN13]
Copier/Printer (PCL)
Network model
[MX-M260N/M310N]
Copier/Printer (SPLC) model

(North America only)
[MX-M260/M310]
Copier/Printer (SPLC) model

[MX-M260/M310]
Exit tray
[MX-TE10]
Machine stand
(Large)
Machine stand
(Small)
[MX-DS11]
[MX-DS12]
Paper feed unit

(500 Sheets)
Paper feed unit

(500x2 Sheets)
[MX-DE10]
[MX-DE11]
[MX-M260/M310]
Data security kit
(Commercial version)
FAX expantion kit
Expantion memory board
FAX memory (8MB)
Printer expantion kit
[AR-FX7]
[AR-SM5](256MB)
[AR-SM6](512MB)
[AR-MM9]
[MX-PB12]
[AR-FR17U]
(For 26cpm)
[AR-FR18U]
(For 31cpm)
Application integration
module kit
Sharpdesk
license kit
Network scanner
expantion kit
Barcode font kit
Flash ROM kit
PS3 expantion kit
[MX-AMX1]
[MX-USX1/
MX-USX5/
MX-US10/
MX-US50/
MX-USA0]
[MX-NSX1]
[AR-PF1]
[AR-PF2]
[MX-PK10]
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 - 1
2. Combination of options list

F : Installable
: Not available
Option
Section
Main unit Model
Note
Model
MX-M260/M310
MX-M260N/M310N
Automatic document Document feeder

feeder and OC
Document cover
MX-RP10
Standard for North America
MX-VR10
Unavailable for North America
Paper feed system
MX-DE10
Paper feed unit (500 x 2 sheets)
MX-DE11
Machine stand
(Large)
MX-DS11
(Small)
MX-DS12
Finisher
MX-FN13
Staple cartridge
MX-SCX1
Job separator tray
MX-TR11
Exit tray
MX-TE10
F
F
Machine stand
Paper exit system
FAX system
Printer system
Memory board
Software
Data security
Item
Paper feed unit (500 sheets)
FAX expansion kit
AR-FX7
FAX memory (8MB)
AR-MM9
Printer expansion kit
MX-PB12
Standard
PS3 expansion kit
Requires installation of the

MX-FN13.
MX-PK10
Barcode font kit
AR-PF1
Flash ROM kit
AR-PF2
256MB expansion memory board
AR-SM5
512MB expansion memory board
AR-SM6
Network scanner expansion kit
MX-NSX1
Sharpdesk 1 license kit
MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
MX-US50
MX-USA0
Application integration module kit
MX-AMX1
Data security kit (Commercial version)
MX-FR17U
For 26cpm
MX-FR18U
For 31cpm
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 - 2
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
(8) Engine speed (ppm)
1. Basic function
31-sheet
model
A3
15
17
B4/8.5 x 13
17
20
A4/B5/A5/8.5 x 11/
5.5 x 8.5/16K
26
31
A4R/8.5 x 11R/16KR
18
24
B5R
21
11 x 17
14
17
8.5 x 14
16
20
A3
14
17
B4/8.5 x 13
17
20
A4/B5/A5/8.5 x 11/
5.5 x 8.5/16K
23
27
A4R/8.5 x 11R/16KR
19
23
11 x 17
14
16
8.5 x 14
16
Paper size
Tray 1-4
A. Base engine
(1) Type
Type
26-sheet
model
Tray
Desktop
(2) Engine composition

Photoconductor kind
OPC drum (Drum dia. 30mm)
Copying method
Electronic photo (Laser)
Developing system
Dry, 2-component magnetic brush

development
Charging system
Sawtooth charging
Transfer system
Transfer roller system
Cleaning system
Contact blade system
Fusing system
Heat roller
Toner supply method
Toner supply by front cover open
Waste toner disposal
Toner cartridge collection
(3) Dimensions / Weight
8K
Manual paper
feed
19
(9) Power source
External dimensions
(W x D x H)
OC model: 623 x 628 x 668mm

RSPF model: 623 x 628 x 788mm
Occupied
dimensions (W x D)
(when the manual
paper feed tray is
extended)
898 x 628mm
Ex Japan in
100V system
Voltage/Current
Warm-up time
23 sec or less (26-sheet model)

25 sec or less (31-sheet model)
Pre-heat
Yes
Jam recovery time
About 10sec, excluding fusing warmup, toner

control, etc.
Conditions: Leaving for 60 sec after door open, standard conditions,

polygon stop.
220 - 240V 8A
110V 15A
120V10% 15A
127V 12A
Frequency
(4) Warmup
Ex Japan in
200V system
50/60Hz
Power source code
Fixed type
Power switch
1 power source
Inlet type
(10) Power consumption

Ex Japan in
100V system
Ex Japan in
200V system
1.44kw
1.45kw
Maximum rated
power consumption
Shift time to sleep
mode
Default (1 minute)
(5) First copy time

Platen
26-sheet model
31-sheet model
B. Controller board
4.8 sec or less
4.5 sec or less
(1) Controller board
RSPF
9.3 sec or less
Measuring conditions: When paper of A4 or 8.5 x 11 is fed from the
SPLC board
CPU
---
machine tray, with the polygon rotating.

Interface
(6) Engine resolution

600 x 600dpi
Smoothing (Print)
1200dpi (equivalent) x 600dpi
Gradation
Writing: Binary
(7) Printable range
Void area image loss
No
USB 2.0
Device
Writing resolution
Max. print size
Ethernet
AB series: 416 x 293mm

(600dpi: 9826dot x 6920dot)
Inch series: 428 x 275mm
(600dpi: 10110dot x 6496dot)
Lead edge 4.0mm or less
Rear edge 4.0mm or less
Total of lead/rear edges 4mm1mm
PCL board
TMPR4937
(64bit, 300MHz)
10Base-T/100Base-TX
Full Speed 1slot
Memory
No
64MB (Standard)
+ 256MB x 1
Memory
expansion slot
---
1 slot (144 pin DIMM

compatible)
(2) Memory
Local Memory
Standard
32MB
Expansion
512MB x 2
Max.
1056MB
C. Operation panel
Type
Dot matrix LCD, touch panel
Size
Monochrome H-VGA 8.1
Display dot number
640 x 240 (H-VGA)
LCD drive display area
192 x 72mm
LCD backlight
Fluorescent lamp backlight system
LCD contrast adjustment
Yes
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1
(3) Automatic document feeder
D. Scanner section
Type
(1) Resolution/Gradation
Reading
resolution
(dpi)
Transmission
resolusion
(dpi)
Copy mode
Platen
400 x 600dpi
RSPF
400 x 600dpi
Scan speed
When in single copy
When in duplex copy
Copy
31-sheet model:
27 sheets/min
(400 x 600dpi)
26-sheet model:
26 sheets/min
(400 x 600dpi)
31-sheet model:
17 side/min
(400 x 600dpi)
26-sheet model:
14 side/min
(400 x 600dpi)
Fax
40 sheets/min
(Normal text, A4R)
17 sheets/min
(Normal text, A4R)
Scanner
31 sheets/min
(300 x 300dpi)
16 sheets/min
(300 x 300dpi)
Document set
direction
Face-up reference
Document standard
position
Center reference
Document transport
system
Sheet through system
Document size
AB series: A3 - A5,0
Inch series: 11 x 17 - 5.5 x 8.5
Document weight
Single face: 35 - 128g/m2, 9 - 34 lbs,

Duplex: 52 - 105g/m2, 13.9 - 28 lbs
FAX transmission mode

Select mode
Normal
text
Fine
text
Super
fine
text
Ultra
fine
text
Input resolution:
OC
203.2
x
293.4
203.2
x
293.4
203.2
x
391.2
406.4
x
586.7
Input resolution:
RSPF
203.2
x
293.4
203.2
x
293.4
203.2
x
391.2
406.4
x
586.7
Transmission
resolution
203.2
x
97.8
203.2
x
195.6
203.2
x
391
406.4
x
391
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Half tone
Scanner mode
Select mode
RSPF
(Automatic duplex document feeder unit)
200 x
200
300 x
300
400 x
400
600 x
600
Input resolution:
OC
600 x
600
600 x
600
600 x
600
600 x
600
Input resolution:
RSPF
600 x
367
600 x
367
600 x
367
600 x
367
Max. loading
capacity of
documents
100 sheets (90g/m2)

Paper thickness of 13mm or less can be set.
Transmission
resolution
200 x
200
300 x
300
400 x
400
600 x
600
Transport disable
document
OHP, perforated documents, photo,

catalogue, second original sheet, tracing
paper, carbon paper, heat-sensitive paper,
wrinkled paper, folded or broken paper,
pasted or cut-away paper, documents of
many perforated holes (2-hole, 3-hole
documents can be used), document printed
by an ink ribbon
Detection
Yes
Detection size
Inch
series
Automatic setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4, A4R
AB
series
Automatic setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, A3, B4,
A4, A4R, A5
Reading
gradation
256 gradations
Exposure
lamp
Electrodeless xenon lamp
Output
gradation
Binary
(2) Document table

Type
Document table fixed type (Flat bed)
Scanning area
297 x 431.8mm
Original standard
position
Left bottom reference
Detection
Yes
Detection size
Inch
series
Automatic setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4, A4R
AB
series
Automatic setting
A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, A3, B4,
A4, A4R, A5
Multi copy
S-S, S-D, D-D, D-S
Mixed paper feed
Enable (Same width only)
E. Paper feed section

Type
Paper feed tray + Multi manual paper feed (Expanded up to 4 trays by installing options.)
Paper feed method
Paper is fed from the above by the front loading system.
Details of paper feed section

Paper capacity
Tray1
Paper size
Tray2
Manual paper feed tray
500 sheets
Standard paper
(80g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,

A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14,
8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5x11R,
5.5 x 8.5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Paper size detection
100 sheets
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5R,

11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 (216 x 356),
8.5 x 13 (216 x 330),
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8K, 16KR
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, A5,

B6R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 (216 x 356),
8.5 x 13 (216 x 330), 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5,
8K, 16K, 16KR, A6R, Envelope*1
No
Yes
Allowable paper type and weight for paper

feed
56 - 105g/m2/15 - 28lbs Bond
Multi paper feed:

Standard paper (56 - 128g/m2)
Special paper, heavy paper (max.
200g/m2)
Single paper feed:
Standard paper, special paper,
second original, heavy paper (max.
200g/m2), 56- 200g/m2 (14 - 54lbs)
Paper type
Standard paper (56 - 80g/m2)

Normal paper (60 - 105g/m2)
Letterhead
Color paper
Standard paper: 100 sheets

(56 - 80g/m2)
Recycled paper/coarse paper:
100 sheets
Postcard/Double postcard
(without fold): 30 sheets
Heavy paper (max. 200g/m2):
30 sheets
OHP/Label sheet/gift wrapping
paper: 40 sheets
Label sheet: 40 sheets
Envelope (AB series: 10 sheets,
Inch series: 5 sheets)
Paper size setting when

shipping
Inch series
AB series
Paper remaining detection
8.5 x 11
---
A4
---
No (paper presence only)
1: Supported envelope kinds: Commercial10 (4 - 1/8 x 9 - 1/2), International DL (110mm x 220mm), International C5 (162mm x 229mm)
F. Paper exit section
G. Copy functions
(1) Center tray of main unit
(1) Copy magnification ratio
Paper exit position/

system
Main unit top surface face-down paper

exit
Paper exit capacity
500 sheets (A4, 8.5 x 11, 80g/m2 paper)
Paper exit paper size/

kind
All kinds of paper which can be fed
Shifter function
Yes (Except for North America)
Paper remaining
detection for paper exit
Yes
Copy
magnification
ratio
AB
series
25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,

115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Inch
series
25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%,

129%, 200%, 400%
Zoom
25 - 400%
(Restriction by the document feeder unit: 50 - 200%)
(2) Density/copy image quality process

Exposure mode
Binary: Automatic, Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Number of manual
steps
5 steps
(3) Duplex
System
Switchback system
Paper size
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17,

8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R
Type and weight of

paper which can be
passed
56 - 105g/m2/15 - 21.3 lbs Bond

Duplex print from manual paper feed can be
made. (Except for heavy paper, OHP sheet,
and other special paper)
(3) PDL emulation/Font
(4) Copy functions

Automatic paper selection
Emulation
Automatic magnification ratio selection

Vertical/horizontal independent magnification ratio
Paper type selection
Auto tray switching
Rotation copy
Electronic sort
Built-in fonts
PCL5e
compatible/
PCL6
compatible
European outline font

= 80 typefaces
Line printer font (BMP)
= 1 typeface
ESC/P
(VP-1100)
compatible
European BMP font

= 2 typefaces
(Roman, San-serif)
Option font
Barcode font
= 28 typefaces
Postscript3
compatible
Job reservation (only during warm-up)

Tray installation priority
Program call-out/registration (10 items)
European outline font

= 136 typefaces
(4) Print channel
Preheat function
Support print
channel
Auto power shut off function
PSERVER/RPRINT for netware environment

LPR
User management (100 items)
IPP
Mixed documents feed (MIX only)
PAP : EtherTalk (AppleTalk)
Binding margin (Left/Right/Upper)
FTP
Edge erase/Center erase (Center/Edge/Center + Edge)
NetBEUI
1 set 2 copy
Raw Port (Port 9100)
Cover paper/Insert paper/Tab insert paper (Cover/Back cover only)
USB 2.0
Multi shot (2 in 1/4 in 1) (Centering available)
HTTP (Web Submit Print)
Card shot (Centering available)
POP3 (E-Mail To Print)
Half binding (Centering available)
HTTPS
Duplex copy direction switching
(5) Environment setting
Large volume document mode
Setting item
Black/white reverse (except for UK)
Basic setting for using the printer, such as

the number of copies, the printing direction.
SPDL
Setting of SPDL symbol and fonts
PS
Setting of print Enable/Disable in case of PS

error
Stream feeding mode (ON/OFF switch by the system setting)
H. Printer function
(1) Platform
IBM PC/AT
I. Image send function
Macintosh
(1) Mode
(2) Support OS
OS
Windows
Scanner
SPLC
Custom
PCL6
2000
XP
Custom
PCL5e
Yes
No
Server
2003
Yes
Vista
Vista x64
Custom
PS
No
Mode
Corresponding
server/protocol
Yes
Mode
Yes
X 10.2.8
X 10.3.9
File format
No
No
No
Fax
---
Scanner
Fax
TIFF
---
PDF
Compression system
Server
2008 x64
9.0 - 9.2.2
Scanner
SMTP
FTP (TCP/IP)
(3) Support image
Yes
Yes
Fax
(2) Support system
Server
2008
Mac
Scan to FTP
Fax
No
Yes
Scan to e-mail
Scan to Desktop
PPD
Yes
XP x64
Server
2003 x64
Outline
Default setting
Non-compression
MH
G3 = MH
MR
G4 = MMR
MMR
JBIG
No
X 10.4.11
X 10.5 10.5.6
(7) Send function
(4) Number of registration items

Item
Scanner
One-touch/ Group
Fax
200 items
(max. 100 items for
one group)
Program
No
Memory box
No
Sender registration
Sender list
Item name
(Detailed setting of
transmission)
500 items
(max. 200 items for
one group)
Max. 500 items in
total with 200 items
of groups
8 items
Bulletin Board/
Confidential/Relay
broadcast, each 10
items
---
20 items
200 items
No
Direct input only

(Default or direct
input)
Scanner
Fax
Memory send
Mode
Onhook
Quick online send
Direct transmission
Auto reductions end

(Auto magnification
ratio send)
A33B4,
A33A4,
B43A4
Rotation send
Recall
mode
Error
Busy
No. of times and time

are set by the system
setting.
No
Long document send
Max. 1000mm
(except for ultra fine
mode)
File name
(Detailed setting of
transmission)
30 items
No
Meta data set list
10 items
No
Receive rejection
number
No
50 items
Polling allow number
No
10 items
Mode
Scanner
Fax
ID number
No
10 items
Automatic reception
System number
No
1 item
Manual reception
Interface ID code
No
10 items
Memory reception
Confidential box
number
No
10 items
Fixed size reduction

reception
Rotation reception
No. of registration
items of senders
Max. 200 items
(8) Receive function
(5) Image process

Mode
Scanner
Document scan color
Fax
(9) Report/List function
Black/White only
Scanner
Fax
Communication record table
Communication reservation table
Bulletin board check table
ID sender table *
Specified by one Specified by onetouch, group, or direct

touch, group, or direct
address input.
address input.
Confidential reception check table
One-touch dial list
Group list
Input from the soft

keyboard
Program list
Selection from
LDAP server
Telephone number list
Interface group list
Resend
System setting list (FAX)
Number of Onetouch address key

registration
Max. (number of keys):

200 items
F code memory box list
User management record table (Fax)
Rejection number list
Number of
addresses to be
registered in a
group (1 key)
Max. 100 items
Confidential ID table
Web setting list
Half tone reproductions
Equivalent of 256 steps
Density adjustment
Auto + 5 steps
(6) Address specification

Mode
Address
specification
Program
Direct address
input
Scanner
Input from the soft

keyboard
Chain dial
Resend
Fax
500 items (including

the group dial)
Number of addresses
registered to 1 group
(1 key) :
max. 200 items
Mode
The sender table is printed as the ID sender table.
8 items
Input with 10 key,
# key, key
(Supported by the
pause key)
The latest single
destination is called
out.
(10) Other functions
Functions
Mode
Scanner
Fax
Time specification
Poling receive
Cover paper adding

function
Page division
Send message
Resolution
200 x 100dpi/200 x 200dpi/200 x 400dpi/

400 x 400dpi
Send
document size
A3/B4/A4/A5/B5/11 x 17/8.5 x 14/

8.5 x 11/5.5 x 8.5/8.5 x 13/8k/16k
Compression
system
MH/MMR/MR
Program
Sender selection
Thin film scan
Communication
result table
(When FAX is installed)

Max. number of FAX number digits 40
digits (excluding the sub address and
pass code)
PC-FAX send
(Max. 200 items)
Broadcast
send
F-code send
(11) Record size

Mode
Scanner
Fax
Max. record width
---
293mm
Record size
---
A3 - A5/
11 x 17 - 5.5 x 8.5
(12) Sound setting

Item
System setting
Onhook sound
Mode
Sound volume setting
Call-out sound
volume
Line monitor sound
Communication end
sound
Sound volume
Sound pattern
Communication end
sounding time
OS
Max.
20 digit
Pass code
Max.
20 digit
Telephone
book
registration,
send function
Covering letter
attachment
function
(Disable when broadcasting)
Covering letter
making
function
(Editing senders is disabled.)
Sender print
Preview
(13) PC-FAX function

Operation
Sub
address
Windows 2000
J. Environmental conditions
Windows XP/XP x64
(Humidity)
Windows Vista/Vista x64
85%
Windows Server 2003 */

Server 2003 x64*
60%
Windows Server 2008 */

Server 2008 x64*
No support for PC-Fax on SPCL CD-
ROM.
PC
IBM PC/AT compatible machine
CPU
Pentium II 300MHz or above
Monitor
Image resolution 640 x 480 pixel or above

No. of colors 256 colors or above
Memory
64MB or more
HDD
Empty capacity of 50MB or above
Interface
USB2.0
10/100BASE-TX
20%
10 C
30 C
35 C
(Temperature)
Standard environmental
conditions
Usage environmental
conditions
Communication LPR/lp
protocol
Port 9100 (RAW)
IPP
Temperature
Humidity
Temperature
Humidity
Atmospheric
pressure
20 - 25C
65 5%RH
10 - 35C
20 - 85%RH
590 - 1013 hPa
(height: 0 - 2000m)
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

1. Supply system table
A. SEC/ SECL/ LAG
No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge (With IC chip)
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
2 Developer (black) Developer
(Developer; Net 300g)
3 Drum
Drum
Life
25K
1
1
1
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
Model name
Remarks
MX-312NT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
MX-312NV
MX-312NR
B. Brazil
No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
3 Drum
Drum
Life
25K
1
1
1
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
Model name
Remarks
MX-312BT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
MX-312NV
MX-312NR
C. Europe/ East Europe/ Russia / Australia/ New Zealand

No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
3 Drum
Drum
1
1
1
Life
25K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
Model name
Remarks
MX-312GT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
MX-312GV
MX-312GR
D. Asia affiliates
No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
3 Drum
Drum
1
1
1
Life
25K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
Model name
Remarks
MX-312AT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
MX-312AV
MX-312AR
E. Hong Kong
No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
3 Drum
Drum
1
1
1
Life
25K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
Model name
Remarks
MX-312AT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
MX-312AV
MX-312AR
F. SMEF/ Israel/ Philippines/ Taiwan/ Agent

No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
3 Drum
Drum
1
1
1
Life
25K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
Model name
Remarks
MX-312FT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
MX-312FV
MX-312FR
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1
2. Maintenance parts list

A. SIICA/ SECL/ LAG (MX-M260/M310)
No.
1
Item
Content
Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller

Fuser gear
Upper heat roller bearing
Upper cleaning pad
Fusing separation pawl (upper)
Thermistor cleaning pad
Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller
Fusing separation pawl (lower)
Fuser bearing (lower)
150K maintenance Drum separation pawl unit
kit
Transfer roller unit
DV blabe
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner filter unit
MC unit
MC unit
Cleaner blade
Cleaner blade
Drum frame unit
Drum frame unit
7
8
9
10

Paper feed roller kit
Fusing unit
Staple cartridge

Paper feed roller kit
Fusing unit (120V heater lamp)
Staple cartridge
Life
150K
1
1
2
1
4
2
1
300K
4
2
2
150K
1
1
1
1
1
10 26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
10 26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
1 26cpm: 225K
31cpm: 300K
1
1
1
3
Model
name
AR-310UH
Remarks
MX-311LH
MX-311KA
(10) MX-311MC
(10)
(10) MX-311CB
(10)
MX-311DU The life of the toner reception seat attached to
the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up
to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
150K
MX-311TX
100K
MX-311RT
150K
MX-311FU
5000 staples 3
MX-SCX1
The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.
B. SEGA/ SUK/ SCA/ SCNZ/ SEA/ SEES/ SEZ/ SEIS/ SEB/ SEN/ SEF/ SMEF/ Russia/ Special country
(MX-M260/M310)
No.
1
Item
Content

Fuser gear
Upper cleaning pad
150K PM kit
Drum separation pawl unit
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner filter unit
MC unit
MC unit
Cleaner blade
Cleaner blade
Drum frame unit
Drum frame unit
7
8

Staple cartridge

Staple cartridge
Life
1
150K
1
2
1
4
2
1
300K
4
2
150K
2
1
1
1
1
1
10 26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
10 26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
1 26cpm: 225K
31cpm: 300K
1
3
Model
name
AR-310UH
Remarks
MX-311LH
MX-311KA
(10) MX-311MC
(10)
(10) MX-311CB
(10)
150K
MX-311TX
5000 staples 3
MX-SCX1
C. STCL/ SRH/ SRS/ SRSSC/ SBI/ Agent (MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N)

No.
Item
Content
Life
Model
name
Remarks

Fuser gear
Upper cleaning pad
1
1
2
1
4
2
150K
AR-310UH

1
4
2
300K
MX-311LH
150K PM kit
Drum separation pawl unit

DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner filter unit
2
1
1
1
1
1
150K
MX-311KA
MC unit
MC unit
10 26cpm: 75K (10) MX-311MC

31cpm: 100K (10)
Cleaner blade
Cleaner blade
10 26cpm: 75K (10) MX-311CB

31cpm: 100K (10)
Drum frame unit
Drum frame unit
1 26cpm: 225K
31cpm: 300K

Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
MX-SCX1
5000 staples 3
3. Developer/Drum life end definition

When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.
When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged as life end.
In an actual case, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the specified
level, it is judged as life end.
To check the drum and developer life, use SIM22-1.
Developer/drum counter
Developer/drum
26cpm model
31cpm model
75K
100K
Number of rotations
(Rotations)
550K
4. Production number identification
<Drum>
<Toner cartridge>
The laser print indicates the model conformity code and the date (year,
month, day) of production.
The label on the toner cartridge shows the date of production.
Label position
Internal product name

Incompatibility
Serial No. in production day (5 digits)

Production place (1 digits)
Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. L for this model.
Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Destination
Version No.
Production year/month/day (6 digits)
4, 5 Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
5. Environment conditions
<Developer>
(Humidity)
85%
60%
20%
10 C
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of the
developer bag.
Standard environmental
conditions
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
Usage environmental
conditions
Number
Indicates the production year.
Storage period
5, 6 Number
Indicates the production day.
7
Hyphen
Number
Indicates the production lot.
35 C
(Temperature)
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows.
3, 4 Number
Indicates the production month.
30 C
Temperature
20 - 25C
Humidity
65 5%RH
Temperature
10 - 35C
Humidity
20 - 85%RH
Atmospheric
590 - 1013 hPa
pressure
(height: 0 - 2000m)
Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot)
under unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured
month under unsealed state
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE

1. External view
1
7
16
4
5
12
11
9
17
13
10
14
19
18
20
21
15
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Name
Document feeder tray
Original guides
Document feeder cover
Reversing tray
Exit area
Document transport cover
Document transport cover knob
Document glass
Power switch
Handles
Operation panel
Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional)
Center tray
Front cover
Paper trays
Upper right side cover
17
18
19
20
21
Side cover
Side cover handle
Bypass tray paper guides
Bypass tray
Bypass tray extension
Function/Operation
Place the original(s) that you wish to scan face up here.
Adjust to the size of the originals.
Open to remove misfed originals.
Pull out to remove misfed originals.
Originals exit the machine here after copying.
Open to remove misfed originals.
Pull to open the document transport cover.
Place an original that you wish to scan face down here.
Press to turn the machine power on and off.
Use to move the machine.
Contains operation keys and the touch panel.
Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this tray.
Finished copies are delivered to the center tray.
Open to remove paper misfeeds and perform machine maintenance.
Each tray holds 500 sheets of copy paper.
Open to remove misfeeds when an optional job separator tray kit or a optional finisher is
installed.
Open to remove misfeeds.
Pull to open the side cover.
Adjust to the width of the paper.
Regular paper and special paper (such as transparency film) can be fed from the bypass tray.
Pull out the bypass tray extension before placing paper in the bypass tray.
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 1
2. Internal structure
4
5
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Toner cartridge lock release lever
Toner cartridge
Roller rotating knob
Photoconductive drum
Function/Operation
Use to unlock the toner cartridge.
Contains toner.
Turn to remove misfed paper.
Copy images are formed on the photoconductive drum.
Fusing unit release levers
To remove a paper misfeed in the fusing unit, push up on these

levers and remove the paper.
Fusing unit paper guide
Open to remove misfed paper.
Note
Do not touch the photoconductive

drum (green portion). Doing so
may damage the drum and cause
smudges on copies.
The fusing unit is hot.
Do not touch the fusing unit when
removing misfed paper.
Doing so may cause a burn or
injury.
3. Operation panel
COPY
ON LINE
DATA
PRINT
SCAN
DATA
FAX
LINE
DATA
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
LOGOUT
No.
1
Name
Touch panel
Mode select keys and indicators

[COPY] key
[PRINT] key/ONLINE indicator/
DATA indicator
[SCAN] key/DATA indicator
[FAX] key/LINE indicator/

DATA indicator
3
4
[JOB STATUS] key

[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
5
6
Numeric keys
[LOGOUT] key (
[#/P] key (
8
9
10
[CLEAR] key ( )
[CLEAR ALL] key (
[START] key ( )
11
[INTERRUPT] key (
Function/Operation
The machine status, messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel.
The display will show the status of printing, copying or network scanning
according to the mode that is selected. For details see the next page.
Use to change modes and the corresponding display on the touch panel.
Press to select copy mode.
[PRINT] key: Press to select print mode.
ONLINE indicator: Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator: A print job is in memory. The indicator lights steadily while
the job is held in memory, and blinks while the job is printed.
[SCAN] key: Press to select network scan mode when the network scanner
option is installed.
DATA indicator: Lights steadily or blinks while a scanned image is being sent.
[FAX] key: Press to select fax mode when the fax option is installed.
LINE indicator : This lights up while faxes are being sent or received.
DATA indicator: Blinks when a fax has been received to memory and lights
steadily when a fax is waiting in memory for transmission.
Press to display the current job status.
Use to adjust various settings of the machine including the contrast of the touch
panel and administrator settings.
Use to enter numeric values for various settings.
When auditing mode is enabled, press this key after finishing a job to return the
machine to account number entry standby.
Use this key to execute a job program in copy mode.
The key is also used to dial in fax mode.
Press to clear a copy number setting or cancel a job.
Resets the settings to the initial settings.
Press in copy mode, scanner mode, or fax mode to begin copying, network
scanning, or faxing.
This key blinks when auto power shut mode has activated. Press the key to
return to normal operation.
Use to perform an interrupt copy job.
10
11
Note
When the network

scanner option is
installed.
When the fax option is
installed.
4. RSPF
A. External view
1
2
3
5
4
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Document set tray
Document guide
Document feed section cover
Document transport section cover
Document exit section
B. Internal structure
11
10
9
8
7
3
5
6
14
12
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Code
EMPS
FGOD
DFCL
DFD
RSOL
CLH
DTM
GSOL
DLS1
DLS2
OPCLS
RDD
SWD
Name
Document set sensor
Open/close sensor
Paper feed clutch
Paper entry sensor
Pressure release solenoid
Transport clutch
SPF motor
Gate solenoid
Interface PWB
Document length detection SW (Short)
Document length detection SW (Long)
Book sensor
Paper exit sensor
Document width sensor
13
1
Type
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Stepping motor
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Volume
Function/Operation
Detects presence of documents.
Detects open/close of the paper feed unit.
Drives document feed on the tray, transport, and paper exit roller.
Detects the document length on the tray.

Detects the document length on the tray.
Detects the SPF float.
Detects the document width on the tray.
5. Sensor
No.
18
19
2
3
25
20
5
21
22
6
7
23
24
25
Name
2nd tray paper upper
limit detection sensor
2nd tray paper empty
sensor
1st tray paper pass
sensor
1st tray paper upper
limit detection sensor
1st tray paper empty
sensor
Toner sensor
Center tray paper
YES/NO sensor
Document size sensor
9
26
10
11
12
13
24
23
22
21
Reverse pass paper

detection sensor
Code
LUD2
Function and operation

2nd tray paper upper limit
detection
PED2 2nd tray paper empty
detection
PPD1H 1st tray paper pass
LUD1
1st tray paper upper limit

detection
PED1 1st tray paper empty
detection
Toner density detection
LOEMP Center tray paper YES/NO
detection
DSIN0 Document size detection
(Inch series: PD1, 2)
(AB series: PD1 3)
DUP2 Reverse pass detection
6. Switch
20
19
18
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Name
Mirror home position
sensor
Document cover
sensor
Document size
sensor
2nd paper exit sensor
(Option)
2nd paper exit full
detection sensor
(Option)
1st paper exit sensor
Shifter home position
sensor (Except North
America)
Paper exit sensor
(DUP side)
Thermistor
1st tray (paper tray)
detection
Manual feed paper
entry sensor
Manual paper feed

tray empty sensor 2
Manual paper feed
tray empty sensor 1
Manual feed length
detection sensor 1
Manual feed length
detection sensor 2
Manual feed paper
empty sensor
2nd tray paper pass
sensor
17
26 16
Code
MHPS
OCSW
DSIN3
POD2
TOPF
15 14

Mirror (scanner) home
position detection
Document cover open/close
detection
Document size detection
(Inch series: PD3, 4)
(AB series: PD4, 5)
2nd paper exit detection
2nd paper exit section full

detection
POD1 1st paper exit detection

SFTHP Shifter home position sensor
detection
PPD2
CD1
PPD1L
MPLS2
MPLS1
MPLD1
MPLD2
MPED
PFD2
Paper exit detection

Fusing temperature
detection
1st tray (paper tray) empty
detection
Sensor of paper entry from
the manual paper feed tray,
the 2nd/multi-tray desk, or
the DUP
Manual feed tray position
detection
Manual feed tray position
detection
Manual feed paper length
detection
detection
Manual feed paper empty
detection
2nd tray paper pass
3
No.
1
2
Name
Right cabinet door
switch (Option)
Door switch
2nd right door switch
Main switch
Code
DSWR0 Right cabinet door open/
close detection
DSWR1 Front door and side door
open/close detection
DSWR2 Side door open/close
detection
PSSW Main power switch
7. Solenoid/Clutch
8. Drive motor
1
2
1
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
9
9
8
7
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
Paper exit gate
switching solenoid
(Option)
PS clutch
Paper feed clutch
Manual paper feed
solenoid
Paper feed transfer
clutch
2nd tray paper feed
clutch
2nd tray paper feed
solenoid
Paper feed solenoid
Separation pawl
solenoid
Code
OGS

Paper exit gate switcher
RRC
CPFS1
MPFS
Main unit paper feed

Paper feed roller drive
Manual paper feed
solenoid
Paper feed transfer clutch
TRC2
CPFS2
CPFC2
CPFC1
PSPS
Solenoid for the paper feed

from the tray
Solenoid for the paper feed
from the tray
Separation pawl operation
solenoid
8
No.
1
2
Name
Mirror motor
Shifter motor
(Except North
America)
Duplex motor
DUP-2 motor
6
7
8
9
Main motor
Tray lift-up motor
Tray lift-up motor
Toner motor
Code
MIRM
SFTM

Optical mirror base drive
Shifter drive
DPXM
Duplex paper switching

and exit motor
Reverse pass for paper
transport
Main drive
Tray paper lift-up
Tray paper lift-up
Toner supply
MM
LUM1
LUM2
TM
9. Lamp
10. Fan/Filter
1
6
7
2
3
1
5
6
1
4
No.
1
2
Name
Copy lamp
Heater lamp

Image radiation lamp
Fusing heat lamp
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Cooling fan
Exhaust fan motor
Intake fan motor
Fusing paper exit fan
Code
VFM
DCFM
DCFM2
VFM2
5
6
7
Fusing paper exit fan

Ozon filter
Ozon filter
VFM2

Cools the inside of the unit.
(31 sheet model)
11. PWB
12. Roller
1
1
11
5
6
7
8
10
5
9
10
11
12
14 13
9
7
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
Inverter PWB
CCD PWB
Option connector PWB
IMC PWB
MCU PWB
Mother board
7
8
9
10
11
Tray interface PWB

DC power supply PWB
High voltage PWB
KEY PWB
OPU PWB

Copy lamp control
For image scanning (read)
Image process
Main unit control
Connection with FAX PWB and
PCL PWB
2nd tray control
DC voltage control
High voltage control
No.
1
2
3
Name
Paper exit roller
Transport roller
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
5
6
7
DUP transport follower

roller
DUP transport roller
Transport roller
Resist roller
Manual paper feed roller
10
11
12
Manual feed transport

roller
1st tray pick-up roller
1st tray paper feed roller
13
14
2nd tray pick-up roller

2nd tray paper feed roller
Operation panel control

Paper exit roller
Paper transport roller
Fuses toner on paper.
(with the Teflon roller)
Fuses toner on paper.
(with the silicone rubber roller)
Duplex paper transport
Duplex paper transport
Transfer images on the drum onto
paper.
Synchronize the paper lead edge
with the image lead edge.
Picks up papers in manual paper
feed port.
Transports paper from the manual
paper feed port.
Picks up paper from the tray.
Transports the picked up paper to
RESIST section.
Picks up paper from the tray.
Transports the picked up paper to
RESIST section.
[5] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Adjustment item list
A
Section
Process section
Mechanism section
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Image density
(exposure) adjustment
(15)
(1)
Adjustment item
Developing doctor gap adjustment
MG roller main pole position adjustment
Developing bias voltage adjustment
Grid bias voltage adjustment
Print start position adjustment
RSPF image lead edge position adjustment
Rear edge void adjustment
Paper off center adjustment
Left edge void area adjustment
Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion
balance adjustment
Sub scanning direction (scanning direction)
distortion adjustment
Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion
balance adjustment
Main scanning direction (FR direction)
magnification ratio adjustment
Sub scanning direction (scanning direction)
Adjustment procedure/SIM No.

Developing doctor gap adjustment
MG roller main pole position adjustment
SIM8-1
SIM8-2
SIM50-5
SIM50-6
SIM50-1
SIM50-10
SIM50-1-8
No. 2/3 mirror base unit installing position
adjustment
Copy lamp unit installing position adjustment
Winding pulley position adjustment
Rail height adjustment
SIM48-1-1
a
b
Off center adjustment (RSPF mode)

OC (RSPF) open/close detection position
adjustment
Original sensor adjustment
RSPF white correction pixel position adjustment
(required in an RSPF model when replacing the
lens unit)
RSPF scan position auto adjustment
Copy mode
OC mode in copying (SIM 48-1-2)

RSPF sub scanning direction magnification ratio
(SIM48-1-3, 48-1-4)
SIM50-12
SIM41-3
SIM41-2, 41-4 (41-1)
SIM63-7
SIM53-8
SIM46-2
2. Details of adjustment
A. Process section
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A.
(1) Developing doctor gap adjustment
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 1.5mm to the positions of three screws

on the developing docter as shown.
1) Remove the doctor cover.
R
A
C
A
F
A
4) Tighten the developing doctor fixing screw.
5) Check the clearance of the developing doctor. If it is within the
specified range, then fix the doctor fixing screw with screw lock.
When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the MG roller.

<Adjustment specification>
Developing doctor gap
+0.1mm
F/C/R: 1.5 -0.15mm
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 1
(2) MG roller main pole position adjustment
(4) Grid bias voltage adjustment (SIM 8-2)
1) Put the developing unit on a flat surface.
1) Execute SIM 8-2.
2) Tie a needle or pin on a string.

3) Hold the string and bring the needle close to the MG roller horizontally. (Do not use paper clip, which is too heavy to make a correct
adjustment.) (Put the developing unit horizontally for this adjustment.)
SIMULATION 8-2
4) Do not bring the needle into contact with the MG roller, but bring it
to a position 2 or 3mm apart from the MG roller. Mark the point on
the MG roller which is on the extension line from the needle tip.
5) Measure the distance from the marking position to the top of the
doctor plate of the developing unit to insure that it is 9.1mm.
If the distance is not within the specified range, loosen the fixing
screw A of the main pole adjustment plate, and move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
2) Touch the exposure mode to be changed.

The current set value is displayed.
3) Enter the set value with the 10-key.
4) Press the [START] key.
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec, and the display
returns to the original state.
Item
Content
A
9.1mm
SIMULATION 8-1
8-1
SIMULATION
DV BIAS COPY SETTING. INPUT VALUE 200-550, AND PRESS
START.
1: AE
426
426
2: TEXT
450
1/1
3: TEXT/PHOTO
450
4: PHOTO
450
5: SUPER/PHOTO
400
6: TONER SAVE
376
2) Touch the exposure mode to be changed.

AE (145mm/s)
590
TEXT (145)
Character
(145mm/s)
590
TEXT/PHOTO
(145)
Character/Photo
(145mm/s)
590
PHOTO (145)
Photo (145mm/s)
590
TONER SAVE
(145)
Toner save
(145mm/s)
AE (122)
AE (122mm/s)
TEXT (122)
Character
(122mm/s)
590
TEXT/PHOTO
(122)
Character/Photo
(122mm/s)
590
PHOTO (122)
Photo (122mm/s)
590
10
TONER SAVE
(122)
Toner save
(122mm/s)
540
(1) Print start position adjustment
Output is made with the entered value, and the display returns to
the original state.
TEXT (145)
TEXT/PHOTO
(145)
PHOTO (145)
TONER SAVE
(145)
AE (122)
TEXT (122)
3
4
5
8
9
10
TEXT/PHOTO
(122)
PHOTO (122)
TONER SAVE
(122)
1) Execute SIM 50-5.

SIMULATION 50-5
AE (145)
590
B. Mechanism section
540
350750
Min. unit: 10V increment
3) Enter the set value with the 10-key.
Item
Default
AE (145)
(3) Developing bias voltage adjustment (SIM 8-1)

1) Execute SIM 8-1.
Setting
range
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(PRINT). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
Content
AE (145mm/s)
Character
(145mm/s)
Character/Photo
(145mm/s)
Photo (145mm/s)
Toner save
(145mm/s)
AE (122mm/s)
Character
(122mm/s)
Character/Photo
(122mm/s)
Photo (122mm/s)
Toner save
(122mm/s)
Setting
range
Default
450
450
START.
1: TRAY1
53
53
2: OPTION
53
1/1
3: MANUAL
53
4: DUPLEX
53
450
450
200650
400
450
2) Touch the item to be adjusted.

The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
3) Press the [P] key.
The display is shifted to the copy menu.
450
4) Select the paper feed tray, the print density, and the duplex mode.
Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
450

Copying is started.
450
400

1
2
3
4
Item
TRAY1
OPTION
MANUAL
DUPLEX
Content
Setting range
0-99
1st tray
Option tray
Manual feed
Back print
Default
(2) RSPF image lead edge position adjustment

1) Set a scale on the OC table as shown below.
53
1-99
6) Measure the distance H between the paper lead edge and the
image print start position. Set the image print start position set
value again.
1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.127mm shift.
Calculate the set value from the formula below.
99 H/0.127 (mm) = Image print start position set value
<H: Print start position measurement value (mm)>
Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in
paralleled with the edge lines.
2) Make a copy, then use the copy output as an original to make an
RSPF copy again.
0mm
0mm
3) Check the copy output. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.

10
5) Set the RSPF lead edge position set value so that the same image
is obtained as that obtained in the previous OC image lead edge
position adjustment.
Fit the print edge with the paper edge, and perform the lead
edge adjustment.
Example:99 5/0.127 = 99 39.4 = about 59
Note: FIf the set value is not obtained from the above formula, perform the fine adjustment.
7) Execute SIM 50-1-2 to adjust the main tray lead edge void.
1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.127mm shift.
Calculate the set value from the formula below.
Adjustment
mode
RSPF
image lead
edge
position
SIM
Set value
Spec value
50-6
1 step:
0.127mm
shift
Lead edge void:

1 4mm
Image loss: 3mm or less
Setting
range
1 99
(3) Rear edge void adjustment

1) Set a scale as shown in the figure below.
A4 (8.5" x 11")
B/0.127 (mm) = Lead edge void adjustment value

<B: Lead edge void (mm)>
2.5mm
5
2.5mm
10
Paper rear edge
2) Set the document size to A4 (8.5" x 11"), and make a copy at

100%.
Example: When setting the lead edge void to 2.5mm:

2.5 /0.127 = about 20
3) If an adjustment is required, follow the procedures below.
Adjustment
mode
Main tray lead
edge void
Print start
position
SIM
50-1
-2
50-5
Void amount (Standard value: 4mm or less)
Set value
B/0.127
99 H/0.127
Spec value
Setting
range
Lead edge void:

1 4mm
Image loss: 3mm
or less
1 99
[H: Print start position measurement value (mm),

B: Lead edge void (mm)]
Scale image
Paper rear edge
4) Execute SIM 50-1 and set the density mode to DEN-B. The currently set adjustment value is displayed.
5) Enter the set value and press the start key.
The correction value is stored and a copy is made.
Adjustment
mode
Rear edge
void
SIM
50-1-6
Set value
1 step: 0.127mm
shift
Spec
value
4mm or
less
Setting
range
1 99
(4) Paper off center adjustment
(5) Left edge void area adjustment
1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0089CSZZ) on the document table.

2) Select a paper feed port and make a copy.
Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the

paper off center adjustment (SIM 50-10) is completed.

SIMULATION 50-1
SIMULATION 50-10
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-99, AND PRESS START.
PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-99, AND

PRESS START.
1: BYPASS
50
50
2: TRAY1
50
1/1
3: TRAY2
50
4: TRAY3
50
5: TRAY4
50
6: DUPLEX
50
Second
print surface
off-center
Set value
50-10
-2
Add 1: 0.127mm
shift to R side.
50-10
-6
Reduce 1:
0.127mm shift to L
side.
5: DEN-A -DUPLEX
18
6: DEN-B
7: DEN-B-DUP
50
8: SIDE VOID
18
9: SIDE VOID-DUP
18
10: LOSS(OC)
43
1/1
4) Place a chart with a clear lead edge (or a ruler) on the OC document table.
5) Use SIM 50-1 (Item 1) to execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed. (1 99: About
0.127mm/Step)
Setting range
Default
6) Reset the adjustment values of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4) to the

original values, and execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed on the lead edge of
paper. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step).
1-99
50
7) Adjust SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) so that the lead edge void on the
print out is the specified value. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
8) Similar to procedure 7, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 6, 7) so that the rear
edge void is the specified value. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
SIM
18
3) Set SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) to 1. (By setting to 1, there is no

void.)

Copying is started.
Adjustment
mode
Paper off
center
18
4: DEN-A -OPTION
2) Note down the adjustment value of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4), and
change the value to 99.
6) Select the paper feed tray and the print density.

Content
Manual paper feed
1st tray
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
Back print
2: DEN-A
18
OK

Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
DUPLEX
43
3: DEN-A -MANUAL
OK
4) Touch the item to be adjusted.

1
2
3
4
5
6
1: RRC-A
Spec value
Single:
Center
2.0mm
Duplex:
Center
2.5mm
Setting
range
1 99
9) Similar to procedure 7, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 8, 9) so that the left

edge void is the specified value. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
10) Make an enlargement copy (400%), and check that there is no
shade of the cabinet printed at the lead edge.
11) If there is a shade printed at the lead edge in procedure 9, adjust
SIM 50-1 (Item 10). (1 5: About 0.677mm)
* If there is no problem, set to 3.
Item
Content
RRC-A
DEN-A
DEN-A-MANUAL
DEN-A-OPTION
DEN-A-DUPLEX
6
7
DEN-B
DEN-B-DUP
SIDE VOID
SIDE VOID-DUP
10 LOSS(OC)
Original scan start position

adjustment
Lead edge position
adjustment value (OC)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment (Main tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment
(Manual feed tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment (Option tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment
(back of the machine)
(Duplex)
Left edge void adjustment
(First print surface)
(Duplex)
Image loss amount
adjustment (Lead edge
image loss set value) (OC)
Setting
Default
range
1-99
43
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-99
1-99
30
50
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-5
Adjustment
mode
Left edge void
SIM
50-1
-8
Set value
1 step: 0.127mm
shift
Spec
value
0.5 4mm
Setting
range
1 99
(6) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion

balance adjustment
1) Remove the OC glass, the right cabinet and the upper right side
cover.
5) Without moving the scanner drive pulley shaft, manually turn the
scanner drive pulley until the positioning plate is brought into contact with No. 2/3 mirror base unit, then fix the scanner drive pulley.
1
3
1
1
2
6
4
4
2) Loosen the copy lamp unit wire fixing screw.
6) Put No. 2/3 mirror base unit on the positioning plate again, push
the projections on the front frame side and the rear frame side of
the copy lamp unit to the corner frame, and tighten the wire fixing
screw.
Wire fixing screw

3) Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley and bring No. 2/3 mirror
base unit into contact with the positioning plate.
At that time, if the front frame side and the rear frame side of No. 2/
3 mirror base unit are brought into contact with the positioning
plate at the same time, the mirror base unit parallelism is proper.
If one of them is in contact with the positioning plate, perform the
adjustment of 4).
(7) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction) distortion

adjustment (Winding pulley position adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
When the mirror base drive wire is replaced.
When the lamp unit, or No. 2/3 mirror holder is replaced.
When a copy as shown is made.
Lb
La
Paper exit
direction
Original
4) Loosen the set screw of the scanner drive pulley which is not in
contact with No. 2/3 mirror base unit positioning plate.
Copy
1) Set A3 (11" x 17") white paper on the original table as shown

below.
La = Lb
6) Execute the main scanning direction (FR) distortion balance
adjustment previously described in 2) again.
(8) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion

balance adjustment (Rail height adjustment)
When there is no skew copy in the mirror base scanning direction and
there is no horizontal error (right angle to the scanning direction), the
adjustment can be made by adjusting the No. 2/3 mirror base unit rail
height.
Place a little clearance from

the rear side original guide.
Before performing this adjustment, be sure to perform the horizontal

image distortion adjustment in the laser scanner section.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
When the mirror base wire is replaced.
When the copy lamp unit and no. 2/3 mirror unit are replaced.
When the mirror unit rail is replaced and moved.
When a following copy is made.
Glass holding plate
A3 (11" x 17") white paper
Original
Copy A
Copy B
Fit the paper edge and

the glass holding plate edge.
2) Open the original cover and make a normal (100%) copy.

3) Measure the width of the black background at the lead edge and at
the rear edge.
1) Make an original for the adjustment.

Make test sheet by drawing parallel lines at 10mm from the both
ends of A3 (11" x 17") white paper as shown below. (These lines
must be correctly parallel to each other.)
Parallel line
Parallel line
10mm
10mm
10mm
10mm
Paper exit direction

La: Lead edge black background width
Lb: Rear edge black background width
White paper
If the width (La) of the black background at the lead edge is equal
that (Lb) at the rear edge, there is no need to execute the following
procedures of 4) 7).
4) Loosen the mirror base drive pulley fixing screw on the front frame
side or on the rear frame side.
When La < Lb
Turn the mirror base drive pulley on the front frame side in the
arrow direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)
2) Make a normal (100%) copy of the test sheet on A3 (11" x 17")

paper. (Fit the paper edge and the glass holding plate edge.)
3) Measure the distances (La, Lb, Lc, Ld) at the four corners as
shown below.
La
Lc
When La > Lb
Turn the mirror base drive pulley on the rear frame side in the
arrow direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)
Paper exit
direction
Rear side
A
Lb
Ld
When La = Lb and Lc = Ld, no need to perform the procedures 4)

and 5).
Front side
5) Tighten the fixing screw of the mirror base drive pulley.
4) Move the mirror base B rail position up and down (in the arrow
direction) to adjust.
Note: A judgment must be made with 200mm width, and must not be
made with 100mm width.
Adjustment
mode
Main scanning
direction
magnification
ratio
Spec value
At normal:
1.0%
SIM
481-1
Set value
Add 1: 0.1%
increase
Reduce 1: 0.1%
decrease
Setting
range
1 99
(10) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction)

(SIM 48-1-2, SIM 48-1-3)
a. OC mode in copying
Note: Execute the procedure after completion of SIM 48-1-1.
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a normal (100%) copy.
When La > Lb
Shift the mirror base B rail upward by the half of the difference of
LaLb.
When La < Lb
Shift the mirror base B rail downward by the half of the difference
of LbLa.
Example: When La = 12mm and Lb = 9mm, shift the mirror base
B rail upward by 1.5mm.
When Lc >Ld
Shift the mirror base B rail downward by the half of the difference
of LcLd.
When Lc < Ld
When Lc < Ld, move the mirror base B on the paper feed side
upward.
When moving the mirror base rail, hold the mirror base rail with
your hand.
La = Lb, Lc = Ld
5) After completion of adjustment, manually turn the mirror base drive
pulley, scan the mirror base A and mirror base B fully, and check
that the mirror bases are not in contact with each other.
2) Compare the scale image and the actual scale.

If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
3) Execute SIM 48-1-2.
The set value is stored and a copy is made.
Adjustment
mode
Sub scanning
direction
magnification
ratio (OC mode)
Spec value
SIM
Set value
At normal:
1.0%
48-12
Add 1:
0.05% increase
Reduce 1:
0.05% decrease
Setting
range
1 99
b. RSPF mode in copying
contact with the frame or the original glass. Be careful to avoid this.

CCD unit is properly installed and that OC mode adjustment in
copying has been completed.
(9) Main scanning direction (FR direction) magnification

ratio adjustment (SIM 48-1)
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a normal (100%) copy to make a test chart.
If the mirror base rail is moved extremely, the mirror base may be in

CCD unit is properly installed.
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below.
Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in
parallel with the front side edge of the glass.
2) Set the test chart on the RSPF and make a normal (100%) copy.
3) After warm-up, shading is performed and the current set value of
the main scanning direction magnification ratio is displayed on the
display section in 2 digits.
4) Manual correction mode (SIM48-1-1)
Enter the set value and press the start key.
3) Compare the scale image and the actual image.

If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
5) After warm-up, shading is performed.
The current front surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio
correction value is displayed in two digits on the display section.
The correction value is stored and a copy is made.



The current back surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio
is displayed in two digits on the display section.
3) If the distance is outside the specified range, adjust the open/close

sensor attachment plate position as shown below.
OC (SPF) open/close position A: 125 225mm

Distance < 125mm: Shift toward A.

Distance > 225mm: Shift toward B.
Adjustment mode
Sub scanning
direction
magnification ratio
(RSPF mode)
Spec
value
At normal:
1.0%
SIM
Set value
48-1-3
48-1-4
Add 1:
0.05% increase
Setting
range
1 99
Reduce 1:
0.05% decrease
(11) Off center adjustment (RSPF mode)

paper off center is properly adjusted.
1) Place the center position adjustment test chart (sheet with a
straight line in the scan direction at the center) on the RSPF.
2) Make a normal copy from the manual paper feed tray, and check
the printed copy with the test chart.
If any adjustment is required, perform the following procedure.
(13) Original sensor adjustment (SIM 41-2, 41-4)

1) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the OC table.
(Keep the SPF (OC cover) open.)

the off center adjustment is displayed on the display section in 2
digits.

4) Check the reaction with SIM 41-1.
Adjustment
mode
Original off
center mode
(RSPF
mode)
Spec value
SIM
Set value
Single: Center
3.0mm
Duplex: Center
3.5mm
50-12
Add 1: 0.1mm
shift to R side
Reduce 1: 0.1mm
shift to L side
Setting
range
1 99
(12) OC (RSPF) open/close detection position adjustment

2) Gradually close the OC (RSPF) from the full open position, and
measure distance A when the display on the operation panel
changes. (See the figure below.)
3) Keep A=125mm, and execute SIM 41-4. (Do not put paper on the
table.)
(14) RSPF white correction pixel position adjustment

(required in an RSPF model when replacing the lens
unit) (SIM63-7)
1) Fully open the RSPF.
3) When the operation panel displays "COMPLETE," the adjustment
is completed.
4) If the operation panel displays "ERROR," perform the following
measures.
When the display is 0:
Check that the SPF is open.
Check that the lamp is ON. (If the lamp is OFF, check the MCU connector.)
Check that the CCD harness is properly inserted into the MCU connector.
When the display is 281 or above:
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box.
Distance A = Table glass top - OC (RSPF) handle rib
3) Slide the lens unit toward the front side and attach it, then execute SIM.
When the display is 143 or below:
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box.
3) Slide the lens unit toward the rear side and attach it, then execute
SIM.
When the lens unit is moved, execute the OC main scanning magni-
fication ratio auto adjustment, SIM 48-1-1.

This adjustment is basically O.K. with SIM 63-7.
(15) RSPF scan position auto adjustment
C. Image density (exposure) adjustment
[Function]
(1) Copy mode (SIM46-2)
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position automatically.
1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the OC table as shown

below.
[Operation]
1) With the RSPF or the OC cover open, place a white paper background on the OC glass. (In the RSPF standard model, the RSPF
glass surface is included.)
Rear
2) Enter SIM53-08, and press [START] button.

Outline of SIM: The optical unit is shifted to recognize the boundary between the OC glass and the RSPF glass cover.
With the same position as the reference, the RSPF scan position is
automatically adjusted.
<Note>
After completion of the RSPF scan position auto adjustment, the
RSPF lead edge adjustment must be executed. (Both surfaces)
There must be no other sheet than the black chart on the glass surface.
Especially when in RSPF scan, the center area is scanned in the
main scan direction. Be careful to prevent external light from entering the scan area.
3) Check that the lead edge is not shifted. (Both surfaces)
(If the original lead edge adjustment has been made properly, even
when the scan position is shifted, it is followed automatically.)
Front
2) Place three or more sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper on the test

chart.
the density (exposure) level is displayed on the display section in 2
digits.
For mode selection, use the [10-key].
Place only the white

paper on the OC glass.
For the RSPF standard-provision

machine, check that the white
paper covers the SPF glass.
5) Change the set value with the [10-key] to adjust the copy image
density.
6) Make a copy and check that the specification below is satisfied.
Note: Place originals in the rear reference, and the test chart in the
front reference when adjusting the exposure.
Density mode
Placing the white paper
The white chart must cover
this area.
Exposure
level
Sharp Gray
Chart output
AUTO
"3" is copied.
TEXT
3.0
"3" is copied.
TEXT/PHOTO
3.0
"3" is copied.
PHOTO
3.0
"2" is copied.
"3" is copied.
TEXT (TONER
SAVE)
3.0
"3" is copied.
TEXT PHOTO
(TONER SAVE)
3.0
"3" is copied.
AE (TONER
SAVE)
Set value
Setting
range
If too bright,
increase the
quantity displayed
on the copy
quantity display.
If too dark,
decrease the
quantity displayed
on the copy
quantity display.
0 99
[6] SIMULATION
1. General
B. Code-type simulation
A. Outline and purpose
(1) Operating procedures and operations
The simulation has the following functions to grasp the machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes in an earlier stage,
and make various setups and adjustments speedily for improving the
serviceability of the machine.
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Various adjustments
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON
2) Setup of specifications and functions
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
3) Canceling troubles
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected item.
1) #/P key (program) ON Asterisk (*) key ON CLEAR key ON

Asterisk (*) key ON Ready for input of a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON
4) Operation check
Press START key to start the simulation operation.
5) Various counters check, setup, and clear
To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main code

and the sub code, press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key.
6) Machine operating status (operation history) data check, clear

7) Transfer of various data (adjustments, setup, operations, counters)
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
The operating procedures and the displays differ depending on the

form of the operation panel of the machine.
1) Press CLEAR ALL key.
(2) How to change the simulation adjustment value set by

the touch panel in the adjustment value entry process
a. Target SIM list
3-7, 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-10, 8-11, 8-12, 9-5, 43-1, 44-34, 46-2, 46-9, 46-10,
46-11, 46-18, 46-20, 46-30, 46-31, 48-1, 48-2, 50-1, 50-5, 50-6, 50-10,
50-12, 51-1, 51-2, 51-9, 53-7
b. Touch panel operating procedure

In the adjustment value setup menu, the selected item is highlighted.
Change is made to the highlighted simulation adjustment value.
If all the list of the adjustment items is not shown on one page, touch
[] and [] button to shift the page.
To change an adjustment value, touch the select the item to change
the adjustment value. (The selected item is highlighted.) Enter the
adjustment value and perform one of the following procedures, and
the display of the adjustment value of the selected item is renewed
as well as the adjustment value.
1) Touch [OK] button.
2) Touch another selected item to change the selection state.
3) If all the list of the adjustment items cover two or more pages,
touch [] and [] button to shift the page.
4) Press [START] key.
* For simulations which allow confirmation print, copying is started
after changing the adjustment value.
(46-2, 46-9, 46-10, 46-11, 46-18, 48-1, 48-2, 50-1, 50-5, 50-6, 50-10,
50-12, 51-2, the bold-faced items in the above list.)
* If the entry value is outside the adjustable range, an error buzzer
sounds and the adjustment value is not renewed. Page shift is not
made, either.
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N SIMULATION 6 - 1
START (Normal mode)

L1
Press the #/P key.
In the cause of SIM which is set by touch panel, the

changed content can be stored by the following key, touch.
[OK] key
Other item selection
key
Press the START key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.

1
Press the clear key.
The changed content

is stored.
Press the asterisk (*) key.

Do you
want to end the
simulation ?
Standby for entry of

SIM code.
YES
Press the clear all key.

NO
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The simulation mode

is canceled.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
Returns to START
(Normal mode).
Do you want
to perform another
simulation ?
NO
2
YES
Is there a sub code ?
NO
Press the SYSTEM

SETTINGS key
YES
Standby for entry of

SIM sub code.
YES
Is it the same
simulation ?
Enter the sub code of

SIM with the 10-key.
3
NO
Press the SYSTEM

SETTINGS key
Is there a item
selection?
NO
YES
Select the mode and the

item with the key
and the item key.
YES
Operation check ?
NO
Operation is made according

to the selected mode and item.
Operating conditions
check ?
YES
If "Operation condition check"

refer to "Sensor display", this
process is not necessary.

NO

to the selected mode and item.
Data clear ?
YES

Select "YES".
NO
The selected mode and

the item are cleared.
Adjustments
or setting (counter data
change) ?
NO
YES
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you
want to change the
content ?

to the select ed mode and the it
(Other modes)
NO
YES
Enter the new setting and

adjustment values.
L1
2. Simulation code list

Code
Main
Sub
1
1
2
1
2
2
3
2
3
10
11
2
4
3
1
5
2
3
1
6
2
7
1
6
8
1
10
8
11
13
14
1
9
4
5
10
Code
Main
Sub
Function
Used to check the operation of the scanner unit

and its control circuit.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector
in the scanning (read) section and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the RSPF unit and
the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
in the RSPF unit and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the loads in the
RSPF unit and the control circuits.
in the finisher and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the
finisher and the control circuit.
Used to make each adjustment of the finisher.
Used to check the shifter operation.
Reciprocating operations are continuously
performed or the home position is checked.
(The shifter is shifted to the home position or
moved in one way by the specified steps.)
in the option tray and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the
option tray and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the display (LED),
LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and
the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and
Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches
and solenoids) in the paper transport system and
Used to check the operation of each fan motor and
its control circuit.
Used to set the aging operation conditions.
Used to set the cycle of intermittent aging.
Used to set the display of the warm-up time.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the
developing bias voltage in each copy mode and the
control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
charger grid voltage in each copy mode and the
control circuit.
developing bias voltage in each printer mode and
charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the
control circuit.
developing bias voltage in FAX mode and the
control circuit.
charger grid voltage in FAX mode and the control
circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the load
(motor) in the duplex section and the control circuit.
Duplex motor RPM setting
Used to adjust the timing of switching from normal
rotation to reverse rotation or from reverse rotation
to normal rotation of the duplex motor.
Used to check the operation of the toner motor and
its control circuit.
14
16
17
21
0
0
1
1
3
4
5
22
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
19
2
3
4
24
5
6
7
9
10
15
1
25
2
Function
Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U2/PF
troubles.
Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
Used to cancel the self diag PF trouble.
Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Used to check the counter value of each section.
Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and
troubles. (When the number of misfeed is
considerably great, it is judged as necessary for
repair. The misfeed rate is obtained by dividing this
count value with the total counter value.)
Used to check the misfeed positions and the
number of misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably
great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
Used to check the ROM version of each unit
(section).
Used to print each key operator setting, the
account information, and the machine adjustment
values.
Used to display of the administrator password.
Used to display the original, staple counter.
Used to check the number of use of each paper
feed section. (the number of prints)
Used to check the system configuration.
Used to display the FAX send/receive counter
(FAX reception and print counter).
Used to check the misfeed positions and the
number of misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably
great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to display the CRUM type.
Used to display the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed
history, the trouble counter, and the trouble history.
(The counters are cleared after completion of
maintenance.)
Used to clear the number of use (the number of
prints) of each paper feed section.
Used to clear the number usage data of the stapler,
RSPF, and scanning.
Used to reset the maintenance counter.
Used to reset the developer counter.
(The developer counter of the DV unit which is
installed is reset.)
Used to clear the copy counter.
Used to clear the OPC drum (membrane decrease)
correction counter. (This simulation is executed
when the OPC drum is replaced.)
Used to clear the printer counter and other
counters.
FAX counter data clear
Used to clear the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Used to check the operation of the main drive
(excluding the scanner section) and to check the
operation of the toner concentration sensor.
(The toner concentration sensor output can be
monitored.)
Used to make the initial setting of toner
concentration when replacing developer.
Code
Main
Sub
1
2
3
5
6
10
12
14
18
22
30
26
35
36
50
56
57
60
69
71
72
1
2
27
4
5
7
9
10
14
15
1
30
2
Function
Used to set whether the job separator is installed
or not. (Since this cannot be detected by hardware
detection, it is set in this simulation.)
Used to set whether the automatic detection of
paper size is made or not.
Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
Setting must be made depending on the use
condition of the auditor.
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and
the maintenance counter.
Used to set the specifications depending on the
destination.
Network scanner trial mode setting
Used to input the Software Key for E-MAIL RIC.
Used to input the Software Key for the PS
extension kit.
Used to set enable/disable of toner save operation.
Used to set the specification (language display) for
the destination.
Used to set ON/OFF of the heater lamp slow-up
control conforming to the CE mark control.
Used to set whether the same continuous troubles
are displayed as one trouble or the series of
troubles with SIM 22-4 when the same troubles
occur continuously.
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not
when the maintenance counter life is expired.
Used to set ON/OFF of the black and white
reversion function.
Gamma life correction setting
Used to set the model code.
Used to set enable/disable of the FAX mode key
when FAX is not installed. (When FAX is installed,
the FAX mode is enabled regardless of this setup.)
Toner near end setting
In the power save time setting, the pre-heat (preheat mode setting) and the auto power shut off
time can be set to the short time setup (pre-heat: 1
min, auto power shut off: 4 min) and the long time
setup (pre-heat: 15min, auto power shut off:
60min).
The letterhead support is set.
When Letterhead paper setting is selected, the
set value of SIM 26-46 (Image output direction
setting) is set to Setting Enable accordingly.
Used to set PC/MODEM communication trouble
(U7-00) detection Yes/No.
Senders registration number/HOST server TEL
number.
Function setting
Used to set the tag number
FSS function setting
FSS function adjustment
Trouble precognition history clear
FSS connection test setting
Displays status of FSS connection
Used to display the sensor status attached to the
machine.
Used to display the status of the sensors attached
to the standard tray and the manual feed tray. (Use
SIM 4-2 for the option trays.)
The sensor of an uninstalled tray is not displayed.
Code
Main
Sub
1
40
2
3
1
2
41
3
4
1
43
10
1
2
3
9
14
44
16
17
34
40
2
9
10
11
12
13
46
14
15
16
18
19
20
30
31
39
Function
Used to check the sensor of the machine manual
feed tray.
Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper
width detector detection level.
The AD conversion value of manual feed width
detection is displayed.
Used to check the document size detection photo
sensor.
Used to adjust the detection level of the document
size photo sensor.
Used to check the light reception level and the
detection level of the original size detection photo
sensor.
Used to adjust the detection level of OC 20
degrees.
Used to set the fusing temperature.
Used to set the paper feed cycle timing when
printing postcards.
Used to make various setups in each mode of
process control.
Drum life correction setting
Used to set the DV count correction.
Used to display the process control correction
information.
Used to display the environment (temperature,
humidity) correction information.
Used to set the toner density control correction
value.
Used to display the toner density control reference
value.
Used to set the transfer current value in each
mode.
Used to set the time from the start of the main
motor rotation (Ready) to the start of toner supply
in previous rotation after turning on the power.
Used to set the exposure level in each exposure
mode.
Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
(Text).
(Text/Photo).
(Photo).
FAX exposure level adjustment
(1 mode automatic adjustment)
(Normal mode individual adjustment)
(Fine text mode individual adjustment)
(Super Fine mode individual adjustment)
(Ultra Fine mode individual adjustment)
Used to adjust inclination for each exposure mode.
Used to set the control method of the exposure
mode.
Used to set the exposure correction value of SPF/
RSPF for OC exposure.
Used to set the AE and the limit value in AE
(Toner save).
(Toner save).
Used to switch the FAX send image quality.
Code
Main
Sub
1
2
48
3
8
9
1
5
6
50
8
9
10
12
1
2
51
8
9
7
53
8
55
9
10
1
61
1
1
63
7
64
1
1
65
2
5
Function
Used to adjust the copy mode magnification ratio
(main scanning direction, sub scanning direction).
Used to adjust the scanner mode magnification
ratio (main/sub scanning direction).
Used to adjust the print mode magnification ratio
correction.
FAX magnification adjustment (read)
FAX magnification adjustment (print)
Used to adjust the copy lead edge position.
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin)
on the print paper in the print mode.
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin)
on print paper in the copy mode. (RSPF)
FAX lead edge adjustment (read)
FAX lead edge adjustment (print)
Used to adjust the print image center position.
(Adjustment can be made for each paper feed
section.)
(Adjustment can be made for each document mode.)
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation pawl ON time.
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto
the resist roller in each section (copier paper feed
section, duplex paper feed section, RSPF paper
feed section). (When the print image position
varies greatly for the paper or when a lot of paper
jam troubles occur, the adjustment is required.)
Used to set the OPC drum separation pawl
operation inhibit. (ON/OFF)
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation voltage
ON/OFF timing.
Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF
width. The adjustment method is the 4-point
system. Set the guide to Max. (A3/WLetter)
position, A4R/Letter R position, A5R/Invoice R
position, and Min. position for adjustment.
Used to enter the RSPF width detection
adjustment value.
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position of the
mirror unit automatically. For the RSPF scan
position automatic adjustment, the mirror unit is
shifted to 11mm before the RSPF glass cover
edge, and is operated automatically to scan
images by the unit of 1 step, detecting the position
up to the glass cover automatically.
RSPF read position adjustment
RSPF exp adjustment
Used to set the soft switch.
Used to check the LSU (polygon motor) operation.
Check speed can select 145mm/s or 122mm/s
individually.
Used to check the result of shading correction.
(The shading correction data are displayed.)
Used to adjust the RSPF white correction start
pixel position automatically.
This adjustment is performed after the lens unit is
replaced.
Used to check the operation of the printer function
(auto print operation).
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display
section) detection position.
Used to check the touch panel (LCD display
section) detection position adjustment result.
Used to check the key inputs of the operation panel.
Code
Main
Sub
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
66
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
30
31
32
33
34
37
41
52
1
14
15
67
17
18
20
Function
Used to change and check the FAX-related soft SW.
Used to clear the FAX-related soft SW.
(Except for the FAX adjustment values)
FAX PWB memory check
Signal send mode (Signal send level: Max.)
Signal send mode (Signal send level soft SW setting)
Printing the confidential password
Print the screen memory contents
Image data memory clear
Used to send 300bps signals.
(Signal send level: Max.)
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW)
Used to register the dial numbers.
Used to perform the dial test. (10 PPS send test)
Used to perform the dial test. (DTFM signal send test)
Used to check the DTFM signal send operation.
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW.)
Used to write the SRAM data to the Flash ROM.
Used to write the Flash ROM data to the SRAM.
FAX information print
Handset sound volume adjustment (Japan only)
Used to clear the FAST storage data. (SEC only)
Used to set the TEL/LIU.
Receive data check
Signal detection check
Communication time measurement display
Speaker sound volume adjustment
CI signal check
Pseudo-ringer check
Used to execute read/write check of the RAM on
the PCL board, and to display the result.
Used to check write/comparison of flash programs.
Used to check the validity of the ROM on the PCL
board and the result is displayed.
Used to clear the printer section setting.
(NVRAM clear)
Used to clear the data area for FLASH ROM
Network Scanner Application.
Used to check the network connection when the
scanner option is installed.
3. Details of simulation
2-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
1
1-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the scanner unit and its
control circuit.
Optical (Image scanning)
Operation
Operation/procedure
Enter the number of operations, and set the magnification ratio and the
original size.
1. Select the desired item, and press the [START] key.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
The scanner unit operates at the speed corresponding to the set value.
The scan counter is displayed during execution.
Set magnification ratio
Document size
Set number of times
25% to 400% (1% increment)

(Default 100%)
Varies depending on the destination.
1 to 999 (0: Continuous operation)
Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
in the RSPF unit and the related circuit.
RSPF
Operation
Operation/procedure
The operations of sensors and detectors in the RSPF section are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
(For the original size, the detection result of the original size displayed
on the copy menu is highlighted.)
EMPS
DLS1
DLS2
FGOD
DFD
RDD
OPCLS
SWD_LEN
SWD_A/D
Original empty sensor

Original length sensor (Small)
Original length sensor (Large)
RSPF paper feed cover open/close sensor
RSPF paper entry sensor
RSPF original exit sensor
Book sensor
Original detection width sensor
(Unit of 0.1mm. Width x 10 is displayed. Example: For
300mm, 3000 is displayed.)
Original detection width sensor A/D value
RSPF width detection size (One of the following is displayed.)

A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, EXTRA, 8K/16K, 16KR
1-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in
the scanning (read) section and the related circuit.
Operation
Operation/procedure
The status of sensors and detectors in the scanner section is displayed. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
MHPS
Note: Executable only when the RSPF is installed.

2-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the loads in the RSPF
unit and the control circuits.
RSPF
Operation
Operation/procedure
Mirror home position sensor
Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
The motor for 10sec, the solenoid ON for 500msec, OFF for 500msec.
(20 times)
2
2-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the RSPF unit and the
related circuit.
RSPF
Operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item
DTM-F
DTM-R
DFCL
CLH
GSOL
RSOL
Content
RSPF motor forward rotation
RSPF motor reverse rotation
RSPF paper feed clutch
RSPF PS clutch
Document exit gate solenoid
Document exit pressure solenoid
Operation/procedure
Enter the number of operations, and set the magnification ratio and the
original size.
1. Select the desired item, and press the [START] key.
The RSPF unit operates at the speed corresponding to the set value.
The scan counter is displayed during execution.
Set magnification ratio
Document size
Duplex
Set number of times
50% to 200% (1% increment)

(Default 100%)
Varies depending on the destination.
Selectable only when RSPF is installed.
1 to 999 (0: Continuous operation)
3-10
3
3-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
the finisher and the related circuit.
Finisher
Operation
Purpose
Adjustment
Function
(Purpose)
Used to make each adjustment of the finisher.
Item
Operation
Operation/procedure
1. Select an item to be adjusted with 10-key, and press [START] key.
2. Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [START] key.
Operation/procedure
Used to display the operations of sensors and detectors in the finisher
section.
FDTPD
FSTPD
FAPHPS-R
FAPHPS-F
FDRPS
FPPD1
FDTLLS
FTPS
FPLD
FSSW
FSLD
FSED
FSHPS
FPRD
Paper delivery tray paper detector

Staple tray paper detector
Paper alignment plate HP sensor R
Paper alignment plate HP sensor F
Delivery roller position sensor
Paper pass detector
Delivery tray lower limit sensor
Tray position sensor
Paper level detector
Safety switch
Staple lead edge detector
Staple empty detector
Staple HP sensor
Process tray paper rear edge detection
Note: Executable only when the finisher is installed.
Item
Content
Installation
range
Default
FPAM ADJUST
Paper alignment
width adjustment
40-60
50
FDRLM ADJUST
Paper delivery roller

descending position
adjustment
40-60
50
3-11
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Used to check the shifter operation.
Reciprocating operations are continuously performed
or the home position is checked.
(The shifter is shifted to the home position or moved in
one way by the specified steps.)
Operation
Operation/procedure
Select item 1, and press the [START] key.
The shifter is reciprocated continuously at the specified interval.
3-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher
and the control circuit.
Finisher
Operation
Operation/procedure
The finisher main motor operates for 10sec, the staple motor 5 times,
the tray lift-up motor one reciprocating operation, other motors max. 20
reciprocating operations from the home position, the solenoid repeats
500msec ON and 500msec OFF 20 times.
1
2
Item
F-R
HP CHECK
Content
Reciprocating operation
Home position check
[Selection 2]
1. Select item 2, and press the [START] key.
2. Move the shifter to the home position or in one way by the specified
steps with the following keys.
[*] key
[0 key
[#] key
SFTHP
Shifts the position toward R side by the specified steps.

Shifts the position toward HP side by the specified steps.
Shifts to F.
Shifter home position (At detection, highlighted)
The staple operation motor operates only when there is no cartridge

installed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Item
FTLM
FSM
FPAM-R
FPAM-F
FPDM
FPS
FPTM
FDRLM
FPGS
FARLS
FSL
Content
Tray lift motor
Staple motor
Paper alignment motor R
Paper alignment motor F
Paper delivery motor
Paddle solenoid
Paper transport motor
Delivery roller lift motor
Paper gate solenoid
Alignment roller lift solenoid
Staple light
4-2
5-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
the option tray and the related circuit.
Paper feed
Operation
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the display (LED), LCD
in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Operation (screen/operation)
Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
The operating states of the sensor and the detector are displayed.
(Only the installed option trays are displayed. For the standard tray, use
SIM 30-2.)
The LCD is displayed as follows. (All LEDs are ON.)

With the upper half highlighted and the lower half normally displayed,
contrast changes Standard MAX MIN. in every 2sec.

PED2
LUD2
PFD2
CD2
PED3
LUD3
PFD3
CD3
PED4
LUD4
PFD4
CD4
DSWR2
DSWR3
DSWR4
2nd tray paper empty sensor

2nd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
2nd tray paper pass sensor
2nd tray empty sensor
3rd tray paper empty sensor
3rd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
3rd tray paper pass sensor
3rd tray empty sensor
4th tray paper empty sensor
4th tray paper upper limit detection sensor
4th tray paper pass sensor
4th tray empty sensor
2nd tray right door detection sensor
3rd tray right door detection sensor
4th tray right door detection sensor
Note: Execution is possible only when the option tray is installed.
(6 sec later)
With the upper half normally displayed and the lower half highlighted,
contrast changes Standard MAX MIN. in every 2sec.
* When returning to the sub menu selection menu, the display of the
standard contrast is displayed for an instant.
4-3
5-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the load in the option
tray and the control circuit.
Paper feed
Operation
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the
control circuit.
Fusing
Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
1. Select the lamp to be checked with the 10-key, and press the
[START] key.
The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened. (20 times)
1
2
3
4
Item
LUM2
CPFC2
CPFS2
TRC2
DM
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
LUM3
CPFC3
CPFS3
TRC3
LUM4
CPFC4
CPFS4
Content
2nd tray lift-up motor
2nd tray pick-up solenoid
2nd tray paper feed clutch
2nd tray transport roller clutch
2nd tray paper transport motor
(3rd tray paper transport motor)
3rd tray lift-up motor
3rd tray pick-up solenoid
3rd tray paper feed clutch
3rd tray transport roller clutch
4th tray lift-up motor
4th tray pick-up solenoid
4th tray paper feed clutch
Note: Execution is possible only when the option tray is installed.
ON/OFF operation of the heater lamp is repeated 5 times in an interval

of 100ms/900ms.
When completing the operation, the cooling fan is rotated at a low speed.
Item Content
1
2
Item
HL1
HL2
Content
Heater lamp 1 (Main) operation
Heater lamp 2 (Sub) operation
5-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and the
control circuit.
Operation
Operation/procedure
When the [START] key is pressed, the copy lamp is lighted for 10sec.
6-1
7-1
Purpose
Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches and
solenoids) in the paper transport system and the
control circuit.
Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
Operation
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation/procedure
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Setting/Operation test/check
Used to set the aging operation conditions.
Operation
Operation/procedure
1. Select the load to be set with the 10-key.
2. Press the [START] key.
1. Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the
[START] key.
When selected without setup, the selected value is registered and

highlighted. When selected with previous setup, the previous setup is
canceled and it is displayed normally.
(20 times)
Press [CA] key, and the simulation will be terminated and the machine
goes into the aging standby mode with the set content.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] is pressed, the operation is interrupted.
This setting is canceled by power OFF.
The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Item
LUM1
CPFC1
CPFS1
MPFS
RRC
PSPS
OGS
LUM2
CPFC2
CPFS2
TRC2
LUM3
CPFC3
CPFS3
TRC3
LUM4
CPFC4
CPFS4
ROGS
Content
1st tray lift-up motor
1st tray pick-up solenoid
1st tray paper feed clutch
Manual feed pick-up solenoid
Resist roller clutch
Separation pawl solenoid
Paper exit gate switching solenoid
2nd tray lift-up motor
2nd tray pick-up solenoid
2nd tray paper feed clutch
2nd tray transport roller clutch
3rd tray lift-up motor
3rd tray pick-up solenoid
3rd tray paper feed clutch
3rd tray transport roller clutch
4th tray lift-up motor
4th tray pick-up solenoid
4th tray paper feed clutch
Right paper exit gate solenoid
The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened.

6-2
1
2
Item
AGING
MISFEED
FUSING*1
INTERVL
WARMUP
DV CHK.
Content
Aging enable/disable setting
Jam detection enable/disable setting
Fusing operation enable/disable setting
The fusing temperature is not controlled.
The heater is not turned ON.
Intermittent setting (Valid only when set to AGING.)
Warm-up save setting
The machine goes into the ready state only by
shading, disregarding fusing and process control.
After going into the ready state, normal control is
performed.
Developing unit detection enable/disable setting
*1: When the machine exits from the fusing ignoring state, the roller may
be cooled down. Therefore, reset the machine to warm up again.
When, therefore, the simulation is canceled by pressing the [CA]
key or when the copy mode display is shifted to the initial menu display in the simulation mode of one page copy, the machine is reset.
Note: In SIM 7-1, pressing [CA] key terminates the simulation and the
machine enters the aging mode without resetting. Therefore, to
perform 4. Intermittent setup, the intermittent cycle must be set
with SIM 7-6 in advance.
Reset is not performed when the machine enters the aging mode.
7-6
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of each fan motor and its
control circuit.
Others
Operation
Operation/procedure
The selected load is operated for 10sec.
Item
1
VFM
DCFM&DCFM2
VFM2
VFM&DCFM&DCFM2
&VFM2
Content
Fusing fan operates
Power cooling fan, power cooling fan 2
operations
Fusing exit paper fan operates
Fusing fan, power cooling fan, and
power cooling fan 2 are operated at the
same time.
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Used to set the cycle of intermittent aging.
Operation
Operation/procedure
1. Enter the interval aging cycle time (sec) with the 10-key pad.
Refer to SIM 7-1.
When the [START] key is pressed in aging, copying is performed continuously. This simulation is used to set the time interval between copy
operations in the unit of second.
This setting is valid when SIM 7-1 (Intermittent setting) is enabled.
Setting range
Default
1-255
3
8-2
7-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Purpose
Used to set the display of the warm-up time.
Function
(Purpose)
Operation
Operation/procedure
Section
1. Warm-up starts by the cover open/close.

(Can be performed repeatedly by open/close of the cover.)
2. The warm-up time is counted up and displayed in the unit of sec.
If the [CA] key is pressed at this time, count-up is interrupted to terminate the simulation. (However, warm-up is continued.)
3. After completion of warming up, WARM UP COMPLETED is displayed and the control returns to the initial screen.
Adjustment/Operation test/check
charger grid voltage in each copy mode and the control
circuit.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Photo conductor
Operation/procedure
1. Touch the exposure mode to be changed.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
Item
8-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
developing bias voltage in each copy mode and the
control circuit.
Image process
Developer/Toner hopper

Output is made with the entered value, and the display returns to the
original state.
Item
1
2
AE (145)
TEXT (145)
TEXT/PHOTO (145)
4
5
6
7
PHOTO (145)
TONER SAVE (145)
AE (122)
TEXT (122)
TEXT/PHOTO (122)
9
10
PHOTO (122)
TONER SAVE (122)
Setting
range
Content
AE (145mm/s)
Character (145mm/s)
Character/Photo
(145mm/s)
Photo (145mm/s)
Toner save (145mm/s)
AE (122mm/s)
Character (122mm/s)
Character/Photo
(122mm/s)
Photo (122mm/s)
Default
450
450
200650
450
450
400
() Linked with the destinations of SIM 26-6.

Linked with the auto exposure mode of SIM 46-19-1.
Default
AE (145)
AE (145mm/s)
590
TEXT (145)
Character (145mm/s)
590
TEXT/PHOTO (145)
Character/Photo
(145mm/s)
590
PHOTO (145)
Photo (145mm/s)
590
TONER SAVE (145)
AE (122)
AE (122mm/s)
TEXT (122)
Character (122mm/s)
590
TEXT/PHOTO (122)
Character/Photo
(122mm/s)
590
PHOTO (122)
Photo (122mm/s)
590
10
TONER SAVE (122)
540
350750
540
590

() Linked with the destinations of SIM 26-6.
Linked with the auto exposure mode of SIM 46-19-1.
8-10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

developing bias voltage in each printer mode and the
control circuit.
450
450
400
450
450
Setting
range
Operation/procedure
Content
Section
Image process
Operation/procedure
The minimum increment is 10V.

The result of (Set value) -200/ 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value
*10+200) is used as the set value.
Item
Installa
tion
range
Content
8-13
Purpose
Default
Function
(Purpose)
developing bias voltage in FAX mode and the control
circuit.
Image process
DENS1 (145)
Density1 (145mm/s)
300
DENS2 (145)
Density2 (145mm/s)
370
DENS3 (145)
Density3 (145mm/s)
420
DENS4 (145)
Density4 (145mm/s)
530
Operation/procedure
DENS5 (145)
Density5 (145mm/s)
600
TS (145)
250
DENS1 (122)
Density1 (122mm/s)
300
DENS2 (122)
Density2 (122mm/s)
370
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec. and the display
DENS3 (122)
Density3 (122mm/s)
420
10 DENS4 (122)
Density4 (122mm/s)
530
200650
11 DENS5 (122)
Density5 (122mm/s)
600
12 TS (122)
250

The result of (Set value) -200/ 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value
*10+200) is used as the set value.
Section
Setting range
Default
200-650
450

The result of (Set value-200) / 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value 10
+200) is used as the set value.
Therefore, an even number must be entered. If not, the entered odd
number +1 is displayed after pressing [START] key.
8-14
8-11
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the
control circuit.
Image process
Photo conductor
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
charger grid voltage in FAX mode and the control
circuit.
Image process
Photo conductor
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure

The current set value is highlighted.
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec. and the display
Setting range
Default
Item
Installa
tion
range
Content
350-750
590
Default
DENS1 (145)
Density 1 (145mm/s)
440
DENS2 (145)
Density 2 (145mm/s)
510
DENS3 (145)
Density 3 (145mm/s)
560
DENS4 (145)
Density 4 (145mm/s)
670
DENS5 (145)
Density 5 (145mm/s)
740
TS (145)
DENS1 (122)
Density 1 (122mm/s)
DENS2 (122)
Density 2 (122mm/s)
510
DENS3 (122)
Density 3 (122mm/s)
560
Operation/procedure
10 DENS4 (122)
Density 4 (122mm/s)
670
1. Select the operation mode with the 10-key.
11 DENS5 (122)
Density 5 (122mm/s)
740
12 TS (122)
390
The operation is performed for 30sec, and the display returns to the
original state.
350750
390
440
9-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Item
1
DMF145
DMF122
DMR145
DMR122
Used to check and adjust the operation of the load
(motor) in the duplex section and the control circuit.
Duplex
Operation
Content
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor forward rotation
(145mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor forward rotation
(122mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor reverse rotation
(145mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor reverse rotation
(122mm/s)
9-4
16
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Duplex motor RPM setting
Duplex
Operation
Operation/procedure
Enter the set value with the 10-key.
When the duplex motor setting is made, the duplex 2motor is also set
accordingly.
Setting range
Default
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)

Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
Trouble
Error
Operation/procedure
2. When 1: YES is selected, U2 trouble is canceled.
(When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
1-13
5
9-5
17
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Adjustment
Used to adjust the timing of switching from normal
rotation to reverse rotation or from reverse rotation to
normal rotation of the duplex motor.
Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to set.
1
2
3
4
16-0
Item
145mm/s
122mm/s
RIGHT 145mm/s
RIGHT 122mm/s
Installation range
18-76
Default
18
18
50
50
Item
Used to check the operation of the toner motor and its
control circuit.
Image process
Operation
Operation/procedure
Press the [START] key and operate the toner motor for 30 sec.
14

2. When 1: YES is selected, PF trouble is canceled. (When 2: NO
is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
21
Setting
Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Specifications
Counter
Operation/procedure
Item
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Content
26cpm
5K
10K
20K
25K
50K
75K (Default)
FREE
31cpm
5K
10K
50K
75K
100K
150K (Default) *
FREE
* When selecting 150K, maintenance message is displayed by implementing the following conditions.
14-0
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Cancel (Trouble, etc)

Used to cancel the self diag PF trouble.
Trouble
Error
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
10-0
Section
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
21-1
10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
17-0
Maintenance count = 150K.
Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)

Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U2/PF troubles.
Trouble
Error
Operation/procedure
DV count = 100K
DR count = 100K
* When maintenance message is displayed, replace consumption part
reaching the number of sheets of maintenance, then clear the
replaced part's counter only.
2. When 1: YES is selected, troubles other than U2 and PF are canceled. (When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
22
22-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check

(display/print)
Used to check the counter value of each section.
Counter
Operation/procedure
Each counter is displayed.
TOTAL
MAINTENANCE
DEVE
DRUM
COPY
PRINTER
IMC
DUPLEX
OTHERS
FAX SEND
FAX RCV
FAX OUTPUT
DEVE RANGE
DRUM RANGE
DEVE ROLL
DRUM ROLL
DEVE LIFE
DRUM LIFE
Total counter
Maintenance counter
Developer counter
Drum counter
Copy counter
Printer counter
IMC counter
Duplex counter
The other counters
FAX Send counter
FAX receive counter
FAX print counter
Developer traveling distance counter
Drum traveling distance counter
Developer rotation counter (K)
Drum rotation counter (K)
Developer life meter (%)
Drum life meter (%)
Function
(Purpose)
Item

(display/print)
Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and
troubles. (When the number of misfeed is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair. The misfeed
rate is obtained by dividing this count value with the
total counter value.)
Trouble
Operation/procedure
Each counter data are displayed.
PAPER JAM
SPF JAM
TROUBLE
JAM counter
RSPF JAM counter
Trouble counter

(display/print)
Purpose
Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.

Trouble
Operation/procedure
The trouble error codes are displayed in the sequence of the latest one
first. Max. 40 items of information are stored. (Older ones are deleted
in sequence.) The machine condition can be estimated by this data.
22-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment/Setting/Check
Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section).
Software
Operation/procedure
Used to display the ROM version of each section.
[Display example]
The counter display is in 7 digits.
ROM version 1.250 [1.25] (up to 2 decimal places)

The display of the protocol monitor and the soft SW follows this display.
22-3
Purpose
Jam contents
2nd tray pick-up miss
3rd tray pick-up miss
4th tray pick-up miss
Multi manual feed pick-up miss
Paper-in sensor lead edge jam
Paper-in sensor rear edge jam
Paper-in sensor reverse jam
Duplex sensor lead edge jam
Duplex sensor rear edge jam
Upper tray paper exit lead edge jam
Upper tray paper exit rear edge jam
Lower tray paper exit lead edge jam
Lower tray paper exit rear edge jam
Abnormality between PS papers.
2nd paper pass lead edge jam
2nd paper pass rear edge jam
3rd paper pass lead edge jam
3rd paper pass rear edge jam
4th paper pass lead edge jam
4th paper pass rear edge jam
Duplex short scale error
Finisher entry port sensor not-reached jam
Finisher entry port sensor remaining jam
Finisher paper exit remaining jam
Finisher staple jam
22-4
Function
(Purpose)
Item
22-2
Purpose
Item
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
BPT
PPD1_ND
PPD1_ST
PPD1_DUP
PPD2_ND
PPD2_ST
POD2_ND
POD2_ST
POD1_ND
POD1_ST
PINT_SHORT
PFD2_ND
PFD2_ST
PFD3_ND
PFD3_ST
PFD4_ND
PFD4_ST
SIZE_SHORT
FPPD1_N
FPPD1_S
FSTPD_S
FSTPLJ

(display/print)
Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
misfeed at each position. (When the number of
misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Trouble
Mis-feed
S/N
Machine serial number
MCU
Main Control Unit
IMC
IMC
OPE
Panel + Panel label code
PRINTER
PRINTER
NIC
NIC
FINISHER
FINISHER
Operation/procedure
FAX
FAX
The misfeed history is displayed in the sequence of recentness by the

name of sensors and detectors. Max. 40 items of information can be
stored in memory. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) The trouble
section may be determined by the data.
PUNCH
UNIT
Punch unit
Function
(Purpose)
Item
(Jam cause code)

Item
TRAY1
Jam contents
1st tray pick-up miss
If it is not installed, - - - - - - - - - - is displayed.

Panel
display
Destination
JPN
Japan
Panel software support language

Japanese, American English, English
Panel
display
Destination
Panel software support language
SEC
SECL
SUK
EFS
SCA/SCNZ
American English, English, French, Spanish,

Brazilian Portuguese
Distributor
area
Purpose
User data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function
(Purpose)
Used to display of the administrator password.
Item
Data
User data
Operation/procedure
Used to display the administrator password.
SEEG/
SEA/East
Europe,
etc.
English, German, Polish, Czech, Hungarian,

Greek, Turkish, Russian, French, Italian,
Slovak
NEU
SEF/
SEES/
SEIS/SEN,
etc.
English, German, French, Spanish, Dutch,

Italian, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian,
Finnish, Danish
CHN
SOCC
Simplified Chinese, American English,

English
TWN
Taiwan
Traditional Chinese (Local support),

American English, English
ARB
Saudi
Arabia
American English, English, French, Spanish,

Hebrew (Local support), Arabic
FAS
Iran
English, Arabic, Persian
EEU
22-7
22-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

(display/print)
Used to display the original, staple counter.
Counter
Operation/procedure
Each counter is displayed.
SPF
SCAN
STAPLE
RSPF counter
Scan counter
Stapler counter
22-9
22-6
Purpose
(display/print)
Used to print each key operator setting, the account
information, and the machine adjustment values.
Data
Setting/adjustment data
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Operation/Procedure
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

(display/print)
Used to check the number of use of each paper feed
section. (the number of prints)
Paper feed
Counter
Operation/procedure
Used to display each paper feed counter.
(Initial screen)
The currently set value is highlighted beside the adjustment item.
1. Select the adjustment item with the 10-key.
The display is shifted to the copy menu and the set value is stored.
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
Copying is started. (Printing at 1200dpi cannot be made.)
After canceling a jam (After picking up, the [C] key is invalid.)
When the other information is repeatedly printed, the display may show
the message, Remove original from original table. However, the operation is performed normally.
Item
Content
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
Manual feed counter

Tray 1 counter
Tray 2 counter
Tray 3 counter
Tray 4 counter
22-10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

(display/print)
Used to check the system configulation.
ALL
All lists group print (Default)
KEY OPE
Key operator information list
Operation/procedure
ACCOUNTING
COUNTERS
List of total number of prints
The detected machine composition is displayed.

(The job separator cannot be detected. Based on SIM 26-1 setting.)
AUDITOR NO.
Department number list
MACHINE SIM
SETTING
Machine simulation setting list
FAX SIM SETTING*1
FAX simulation setting list (Only when

the FAX board is installed. The display
does not go to the print data transfer
display, but to the FAX SIM menu.)
* When the IMC board is not installed, key input is disabled.

* Duplex print cannot be made.
* For the FAX SIM setting list, the display and the operating procedures differ.
Note: When the simulation is canceled, the display returns to the original state but the machine is not reset.
Item
SPEED
DF
OUTPUT
CASETTE1
CASETTE2
IMC MEM
PRINTER
PS3
NIC
SCANNER
FAX
FAX MEM
HAND SET
USB HOST
Specifications
Option
Display items
26CPM/31CPM
NONE/[1: RSPF]
NONE/[2: Finisher]/[3: Job separator]
NONE/[4: One-step paper feed unit]
NONE/[5: Two-step paper feed unit]
NONE/Expansion memory capacity (MB)
NONE/[6: PRINTER]
NONE/[7: PS3]
NONE/[8: NIC]
NONE/[9: SCANNER]
NONE/[10: FAX]
NONE/Memory capacity (MB)
NONE/[11: Handset]
NONE/USB HOST
Item
ICCARDR/W
Display items
Error code
NONE/MX-ECX2
Name
Sensor name
NONE: When it is not installed, - - - - - - - - - - is displayed.

[ ]: Shows the product code in the list below.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Item
Model code
RSPF
Finisher
Job separator
1 tray paper feed unit
2 tray paper feed unit
PRINTER
PS3
NIC
SCANNER
FAX
Handset
MX-RP10
MX-FN13
MX-TR11
MX-DE10 (*1)
MX-DE11 (*1)
MX-PB12
MX-PK10
STANDARD (Only SoftNic)
MX-NSX1
AR-FX7
AR-HN4
*1: The number of installed units is displayed beside the model code.
For the tray, only the option tray is displayed.
22-11
(display/print)
Used to display the FAX send/receive counter
(FAX reception and print counter).
FAX
Counter
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation/procedure
RSPF long size

error
ORG_LONG
SPF P-OUT
sensor
SPF P-IN
sensor
Paper Reached/
Not Reached to
the sensor
Reached
Reached
22-13
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

(display/print)
Specifications
Operation/Procedure
Item
00
01
02
03
04
05
99
Content
Not fixed.
AR-A
AR-B
AR-C
China
Japan
Conversion completed.
22-19
Used to display the FAX send/receive counter.

FAX SEND PAGE/TIME
FAX RECEIVE PAGE/TIME
FAX OUTPUT
FAX send page and time

FAX receive page and time
FAX output (number of print)

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

(display/print)
Used to display the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Network scanner
Counter
Operation/procedure
Used to display the scanner counter.
22-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

(display/print)
Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it
can be judged as necessary for repair.)
RSPF
Trouble
Misfeed
Operation/procedure
Used to display the RSPF jam history data sequentially from the latest
one.
Forty RSPF jam histories are displayed sequentially from the latest.
Error code
Name
Sensor name
RSPF paper in lead

edge jam
RSPF paper in rear
edge jam
SPF P-IN
sensor
SPF P-IN
sensor
RDD_ND
RSPF paper out

lead edge jam
SPF P-IN
sensor
RDD_ST
RSPF paper out

rear edge jam
SPF P-OUT
sensor
JAM_REV
RSPF duplex
reverse jam
SPF P-IN
sensor
ORG_SHORT
RSPF short size

error
SPF P-IN
sensor
DFD_ND
DFD_ST
Paper Reached/
Not Reached to
the sensor
SCANMODE
Scanner mode counter
24
24-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed history,
the trouble counter, and the trouble history. (The
counters are cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Memory
Counter
Operation/procedure
Not Reached
Jam/trouble counter is cleared individually. (The history of each

counter is deleted when clearing)
Reached
1. Select the counter to be cleared with the 10-key.
Reached,
P_OUT Not
Reached
Reached, P_IN
passed (OFF)
Not Reached
(Paper after
reversing)
Passed (OFF at
JAM)

The confirmation menu is shown.
3. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
1
2
3
Item
JAM
SPF JAM
TROUBLE
Content
JAM counter/JAM history
RSPF JAM counter/RSPF JAM history
Trouble counter/Trouble history
24-5
24-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints)
of each paper feed section.
Paper feed
Counter
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Operation/procedure
Used to clear each paper feed counter individually.
Item
Data clear
Used to reset the developer counter. (The developer
counter of the DV unit which is installed is reset.)
Image process
Counter
Developer
Operation/procedure
2. Press the [START] key. The confirmation menu is shown.

3. Select 1: YES.
2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
1
2
3
4
5
Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
1: YES (Cleared)
Content
Manual feed counter
Tray 1 counter
Tray 2 counter
Tray 3 counter
Tray 4 counter
24-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the copy counter.
Counter
Copier
Operation/procedure
24-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the number usage data of the stapler,
RSPF, and scanning.
Transport/Finisher
Counter

2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
Operation/procedure
24-7
Used to clear the original and staple counters individually.
Purpose

3. Select 1: YES.
Section
1: YES (Cleared)
Item
1
2
3
SPF
SCAN
STAPLE
Function
(Purpose)
Content
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the OPC drum (membrane decrease)
correction counter. (This simulation is executed when
the OPC drum is replaced.)
Image process
Photo conductor
Counter
Operation/procedure
RSPF counter
Scan counter
Stapler counter

2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
24-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Data clear
Used to reset the maintenance counter.
Counter
Operation/procedure
1. Press the [START] key. The confirmation menu is shown.
2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
24-9
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the printer counter and other counters.
Printer
Counter
Printer
Operation/procedure
3. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
1
2
3
4
Item
PRINTER
IMC
DUPLEX
OTHERS
Content
Printer counter
IMC counter
DUPLEX counter
The other counters
25-2
24-10
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
FAX counter data clear
FAX
Counter
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Operation/procedure
Setting
Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration
when replacing developer.
Image process
1. Select the 3: NUMBER OF PRINTS, and press the [START] key.

Operation/procedure
2. Select 1: YES.
1) Open the cover with the power OFF.

2) Turn on the power. (Since the cover is open, the machine does not
perform initializing.)
1: YES (Cleared)
1
2
3
Item
FAX SEND
(PAGE & TIME)
FAX RECEIVE
(PAGE & TIME)
FAX OUTPUT
Content
FAX send page and time
FAX receive page and time
FAX output (number of prints)
3) Execute the simulation.

4) Enter SIM 25-2. ([25] [START] key [2] [START] key)
5) Close the cover just before starting the simulation.
The main motor rotates. After stirring for 3 min, the toner density
control sensor value is sampled 16 times, and the average value is
stored.
When EE-EU or EE-EL after completion, an error display is shown.
24-15
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Scanner section
Counter
Note: After completion of execution, be sure to press the [CA] key to

cancel the simulation.
26
Operation/procedure
26-1

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
Item
The scanner mode counter and the number of send of the scanner are
cleared.
* The simulation to perform communication with the PCL is inhibited
until Notice Page storing is completed. (Only when the serviceman
call error occurs.)
* When in other than the serviceman call error, entering the simulation
is not allowed from the system check display.
25-1
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation/procedure
1. Select the set value with the 10-key.
Set value
0
1
Connection option
None (default)
Job separator provided.
26-2
25
Purpose
Setting
Used to set whether the job separator is installed or
not. (Since this cannot be detected by hardware
detection, it is set in this simulation.)
Specifications
Option
Used to check the operation of the main drive
(excluding the scanner section) and to check the
operation of the toner concentration sensor. (The toner
concentration sensor output can be monitored.)
DRIVE
Operation
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation/procedure
1. Select the item with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
Used to set the automatic size detection.
2. Set whether automatic detection of paper size is made or not with
the 10-key.
Operation/procedure
The main motor rotates to start monitoring the toner density control
sensor. (3min operation)
* Even in toner end error, if there is no other error (including cover
open) after turning on the power, this simulation can be performed.
Setting
Used to set whether the automatic detection of paper
size is made or not.
Paper feed
Specifications
1:B4/LG,FC
2:A4<->LT
Setting to detect B4/Legal as FC

0: B4 legal is detected as B4 legal. (Default)
1: B4 legal is detected as FC.
This setup detects Letter as A4 in the inch series and
A4 as Letter in the AB series.
0: Detection disable (Default)
1: Detection valid
8.5 x 13 detection valid/invalid setup

Set value
0
1
Setup
Detection invalid
Detection valid
Remarks
Default
Operation/procedure
Detection size when 8.5 x 13 document/paper is used.

Employed
unit
Docu
ment
Destina
tion
Document
size
AB
series
FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
Document
table/
RSPF
Inch
series
Paper
Manual
paper feed
tray
Inch
series
B4
B4
B4
FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
WLT
(11 x 17)
All
destina
tions
AB
series
0
(Invalid)
B4
B4
Machine
paper feed
tray
Set value
1
(Valid)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
WLT
(11 x 17)
Select the mode corresponding to the auditor specification mode with

the 10-key.
Item
Content
P10
Built-in auditor mode
VENDOR
Coin vendor mode
OTHER
Others
Setting
range
Default
0-2
When 1: VENDOR (Coin vendor mode) is set, the following three

items of key operation setting are changed.
1) Set the LCD backlight change inhibit to 1: OFF (Enable).
2) When SIM 26-6 destination setting is set to 0: Japan, duplex copy
inhibit setting must be set to 0: ON (Inhibit).
3) Set the sort automatic selection to 0: OFF (Disable).
Set with key operations.
FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4
FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4
LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4
LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
B4
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
B4
26-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the
maintenance counter.
Specifications
Counter
Operation/procedure
Used to set the count up number (1 or 2) when an A3/WLT paper
passes through.
A4/LT (8.5 x 11) detection enable/disable setup
For the drum counter and the developer counter, double count is
employed unconditionally.
In the inch series, Letter is detected as A4; in the AB series, A4 is

detected as Letter.
(Target counter selection)
Set value
0
1
Setup
Detection invalid
Detection valid
Remarks
Default
Detection size when A4/LT (8.5 x 11) document/paper is used.

Employed
unit
Docu
ment
Paper
Document
table/
RSPF
Machine
paper feed
tray
Manual
paper feed
tray
Destina
tion
AB
series
Inch
series
All
destina
tions
All
destina
tions
Document
size
A4
LT
(8.5 x 11)
A4
LT
(8.5 x 11)
Set value
0
1
(Invalid)
(Valid)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
Set with key
operations.
Regardless of the
simulation setup.
26-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
Setting must be made depending on the use condition
of the auditor.
Auditor
Specifications
Item
Content
TOTAL COUNTER
Total counter
MAINTENANCE COUNTER
Maintenance counter
Used to set the count up number of the selected counter.

Item
Content
SINGLE COUNT
Single count
DOUBLE COUNT
Double count
Setting range
Default
1-2
26-6
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
Used to set the specifications depending on the
destination.
Specifications
Destination
Operation/procedure
Select the destination with the 10-key.
By changing the destination, some other setting items may be changed.
Item
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
JAPAN
SEC
SECL
SEEG
SUK
SCA
SEF
INEG
ABEG
INEF
ABEF
CHINESE
TAIWAN
SEEG2
TAIWAN2
Content
Japan
SEC
SECL
SEEG
SUK
SCA
SEF
EX inch series
EX AB series
EX inch series (FC)
EX AB series (FC)
China
Taiwan AB
SEEG2
Taiwan China
Setting
range
Default
0-14
Operation/procedure
26-10
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Setting
Network scanner trial mode setting
Scanner
Operation/procedure
Enter the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
0
1
Item
END
START
Content
Trail mode cancel
Trial mode start
Default
The current setup is displayed with ON or OFF.

Enter an input (20 digits) of the PS expansion kit soft key with the 10key and press the [START] key, and the collating result is displayed
with OK or NG.
After canceling the simulation, if OK, the PS expansion kit function is
enable; if NG, the PS expansion kit function is disabled.
This setting must be reset after the simulation cancel.
Note: Executable only when the PCL/PS3 is installed.
If the trial scanner counter value is less than 500, the trial mode setting
can be repeatedly made. If the scanner trial counter value is 500 or
more, the trial mode setting cannot be made.
When the scanner is not set and the scanner trial counter value is less
than 500, if 1 is entered in SIM26-10, the trial mode setting is started.
If 0 is entered in SIM26-10, the trial mode setting is canceled.
After recognition of the scanner, the trial mode setting cannot be made.
(Entering 1 is invalid and a beep sound is produced.)
When this setting is made, the machine must be reset after canceling
the simulation. When 1: Trial mode start is selected, the scanner
function is valid. If 0: Trial mode cancel is selected, the scanner function is invalid.
When setting is invalid (when the scanner is recognized or the scanner
trial counter value is 500 or more) in the key operations of the trail
mode setting, an invalid sound (beep sound) is made. In the other
case, a valid sound is made.
* When the scanner trial counter value is changed from 500 or more to
less than 500, the trail setting is changed from END to SETTING
START.
Note: Executable only when the PCL/SCANNER is installed.
26-18
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
Used to set enable/disable of toner save operation.
Specifications
Operation mode (Common)
Operation/procedure
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
Item
0
1
OFF
ON
Content
Disable
Enable
Setting
range
Default
0-1
Note: Setup is allowed only for Japan and UK.
26-22
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
Used to set the specification (language display) for the
destination.
Specifications
Operation/procedure
Select the display language with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.
26-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to input the Software Key for E-MAIL RIC.
E-MAIL RIC
Specifications
Operation/procedure
The current setup is displayed with ON or OFF.
Enter an input (20 digits) of the E-MAIL RIC soft key with the 10-key
and press the [START] key, and the collating result is displayed with OK
or NG.
After canceling the simulation, if OK, the E-MAIL RIC function is
enable; if NG, the E-MAIL RIC function is disabled.
This setting must be reset after the simulation cancel.
* If recognition is OK, the E-Mail RIC can be set to Enable. If the FAX
is installed, however, the operation cannot be made actually.
Note: Executable only when the PCL/NIC is installed.
26-14
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to input the Software Key for the PS extention kit.
Printer
Specifications
This setup varies in connection with SIM 26-6 (Destination setup).

Item
Remarks
0 JAPANESE
1 ENG.US
2 ENG.UK
3 FRENCH
4 GERMAN
5 ITALY
6 DUTCH
7 SWEDISH
8 SPANISH
9 PORTUGUESE
10 TURKISH
11 GREEK
12 POLISH
13 HUNGARIAN
14 CZECH
15 RUSSIAN
16 FINNISH
17 NORWEGIAN
18 DANISH
19 CHINESE
20 TAIWANESE
Traditional Chinese supported locally
21 SLOVAK
22 HEBREW
Supported locally
BRAZILIAN
23
PORTUGUESE
24 ARABIC
25 FARSI
26-56
26-30
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
Used to set ON/OFF of the heater lamp slow-up control
conforming to the CE mark control.
Specifications
Operation/procedure
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Operation/procedure
Sets enable/disable of the gamma life correction function.
Item
0
1
Default
U.S.A, Canada, Australia, France, Taiwan
Others
OFF
ON
26-35
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setup
Used to set whether the same continuous troubles are
displayed as one trouble or the series of troubles with
SIM 22-4 when the same troubles occur continuously.
Specifications
Operation/procedure
Enter the set value with 10-key, and press [START] key.
Item
0 ONCE
1 ANY
Content
When two or more troubles occur, only one is
registered.
All the troubles occurred are registered.
Default
Item
AE (Japan)
AE (Ex Japan)
Text
Text/Photo
Photo (Error diffusion)
Photo (Dither)
T/S AE (Japan)
T/S AE (Ex Japan)
T/S Text
T/S Text/Photo
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set value
0: Disable
1: Enable
Default
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
26-57
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Setting
Used to set the model code.
Operation
Operation/procedure
0
26-36
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
Gamma life correction setting
Operation
Setting
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not
when the maintenance counter life is expired.
Operation
Operation/procedure
Item
MX-M260N
MX-M310N
MX-M260
MX-M310
MX-M260FG
MX-M260FP
MX-M310FG
MX-M310FP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Default
0
1
Item
STOP
NON STOP
Content
Stop
Non stop
Default
26-60
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Note: Executable only with SRU (AR models).
Item
Operation/procedure
26-50
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
Used to set ON/OFF of the black and white reversion
function.
Operation
Operation/procedure
Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
0
1
Item
ON
OFF
Setting
Used to set enable/disable of the FAX mode key when
FAX is not installed. (When FAX is installed, the FAX
mode is enabled regardless of this setup.)
Operation
Content
Enable
Disable
Default
1 (U.K.)
0 (Others)
Content
Default
U.S.A, Canada,
U.K., Australia
Effective (The message with

FAX uninstalled is displayed.)
Disable (Error Beep)
Item
0
ON
OFF
Others
1
26-69
27
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Setting
Toner near end setting
Operation
27-1
Operation/procedure
1
Item
Toner preparation
message display
setting.
Toner near end
massage display
setting.
Toner end status
operation setting.
E-mail alert sending

timing setting.
Set value
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
Default
0
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
1: Operate
2: Operate (However, if
CRUM ID matches, not
operates.)
3: Not operate
0: When the near near
toner end, the toner low
status is sent.
1: When the near toner
end, the toner low
status is sent.
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to set PC/MODEM communication trouble
(U7-00) detection Yes/No.
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Specifications
Operation/procedure
Item
Content
Default
OFF
In case of the communication trouble, U7-00 is

not displayed.
ON
In case of the communication trouble, U7-00 is

displayed.
1
27-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Setting
Senders registration number/HOST server
TEL number.
Operation/procedure
1. The current setting value is displayed in PRESENT field.
26-71
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
In the power save time setting, the pre-heat (pre-heat
mode setting) and the auto power shut off time can be
set to the short time setup (pre-heat: 1 min, auto power
shut off: 4 min) and the long time setup (pre-heat:
5min, auto power shut off: 30min).
2. Enter the number with 10-key, the setting value is saved and the
display of PRESENT is updated.
27-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Setting
Function setting
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
Select the short time setup or the long time setup of the pre-heat time
and the auto power shut off time with the 10-key, and press the
[START] key.
Enter the item number of setting with 10-key, press [START] key.
Item
1
2
Content
Preheat: 1min, auto power shut off: 4min
Preheat: 5min, auto power shut off: 30min
Display
Default
Note: When the sub code 71 is entered to display the setting menu,the
default values are always displayed. (However,the default time is
not always set.)
3
4
26-72
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
The letterhead support is set.
When Letterhead paper setting is selected, the set
value of SIM 26-46 (Image output direction setting) is
set to Setting Enable accordingly.
Operation/procedure
Item
0
1
OFF
ON
Content
Letterhead paper is not set.
Letterhead paper is set.
Setting
range
Default
0-1
RETRY
BUSY
TIMER
(MINUTES)
BUSY
RETRY
ERROR
TIMER
(MINUTES)
ERROR
TONER
ORDER
TIMING
FAX INIT
RETRY
Contents
Recall number setting when
busy (unit: times)
Recall interval setting when
busy (unit:minute)
Recall number setting when
send error (unit: times)
Recall interval setting when
send error (unit: minute)
Toner order
auto send
timing setting
Empty
Near End
25% or less
25-49%
50-74%
75-100%
Retry number setting of initial
connection (unit: times)
Setting
range
Default
0-5
1-15
0-15
1-15
0-5
0-15
0
1
2
3
4
5
27-15
27-5
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Setting
Used to set the tag number
Data
Displays status of FSS connection
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
1. The currently set number is displayed on the PRESENT column.
0
1
2. Enter the new tag number (Max. 8 digits) with the 10-key.
The entered number is displayed on the NEW column.
Item
OFF
ON
Content
Not connected
Connected

The set value is stored and PRESENT is revised.
30
27-7
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Setting
FSS function setting
30-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation/procedure
Enter the item number of setting with 10-key, press [START] key.
1
Item
FUNCTION*
ALERT
CONNECTION
Set value
0: FSS function enable
1: FSS function disable (*) (Default)
0: Alert call enable (Default)
1: Alert call enable
0: FAX connect enable (Default)
1: E-MAIL connect enable
Operation/procedure
Setting
range
Default
0-100
50
PPD1H
PPD1L
PPD2
POD1
DVCH
DRST
DSWR1
SFTHP
POD2
TOPF
DSWR0
LOEMP
DUP2
POD3
PTOPF
1-100
10
30-2
(*) The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to
Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.)
27-9
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Setting
FSS function adjustment
Operation/procedure
Display
Contents
FEED TIME1
FEED TIME2
JAM ALERT
Sensor distance transport

time (main unit)
Sensor distance transport
time (RSPF)
Continuous JAM alert
judgment
PS paper detection 1 sensor

PS paper detection 2 sensor
Fusing paper sensor
1st paper exit paper out sensor
Developing cartridge detection sensor
Drum intial detection sensor
Interlock switch (side door)
Shifter home position sensor
2nd paper exit paper out sensor
2nd paper exit full detection sensor
2nd paper exit cover open/close detection sensor
1st paper exit empty detection sensor
Reverse path paper sensor
Right paper exit sensor
Right paper exit full sensor
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
27-10
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Setting
Trouble precognition history clear
Operation/procedure
Used to display the sensor status attached to the
machine.
Others
Operation
Section
Item
Used to display the status of the sensors attached to
the standard tray and the manual feed tray. (Use SIM
4-2 for the option trays.)
The sensor of an uninstalled tray is not displayed.
Paper feed
Operation
Target of history that is cleared
Operation/procedure
Scan gain retry times history
Sensor distance paper transport history (main unit/RSPF)

27-14
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Setting
FSS connection test setting
Operation/procedure
0
1
Item
OFF
ON
Content
FSS connection test disable
FSS connection test enable
PED1
LUD1
CD1
PED2
LUD2
CD2
PFD2
DSWR2
MPED
MPLS1
MPLS2
MPLD1
MPLD2
1st tray paper empty sensor

1st tray paper upper limit detection sensor
1st tray empty sensor
2nd tray paper empty sensor
2nd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
2nd tray empty sensor
2nd tray paper pass sensor
2nd tray right door detection sensor
Manual tray paper empty detection
Manual tray length detection 1
Manual feed paper length detection 1
Width detection size of the manual feed tray (one of them is displayed.)
A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, POSTCARD, EXTRA,
8K/16K
(At detection, highlighted)
40
41
40-1
41-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the sensor of the machine manual feed
tray.
Paper feed
Operation
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the document size detection photo
sensor.
Others
Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
The operation status of the sensors and detectors in the original size
detection section are displayed. The active sensors and detectors are
highlighted.
MPLS1
MPLS2
MPLD1
MPLD2

Original cover state

Open: Highlighted display
Close: Normal display
Original sensor status
Without original: Normal display
With original: Highlighted display
OCSW
Width detection size of the manual feed tray (one of them is displayed.)
A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, POSTCARD, EXTRA,
8K/16K
For AB series, PD1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, PD1 to 4.
40-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper width
detector detection level.
Paper feed
Operation
Operation/procedure
The adjustment method is of the 4-point system. Set the guide to Max.
(A3/WLetter) position, A4R/Letter R position, A5R/Invoice R position,
and Min. position for adjustment.
1) Set A3/W Letter and fit the guide, then press the [START] key.
2) Set A4R/LetterR and fit the guide, then press the [START] key.
3) Set to A5R/INVOICE R and fit the guide, then press the [START] key.
4) Narrow the guide at minimum, press the [START] key.
5) Set the paper detection width (+), and press the [START] key.
6) Set the paper detection width (), and press the [START] key.
If FAILED is displayed in procedure 1), 2), 3), or 4), it is NG of adjustment. Repeat the adjustment.
Middle position adjustment L
Middle position adjustment S
Yes
No
Yes
No
MID-L ADJ.ON
MID-L ADJ.OFF
NID-S ADJ.ON
MID-S ADJ.OFF
41-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
The AD conversion value of manual feed width
detection is displayed.
Paper feed
Operation
Operation/procedure
Adjustment
Used to adjust the detection level of the document size
photo sensor.
Others
Operation
Operation/procedure
Place an A3 (or WLT) document on the document table, and press
[START] key with the OC cover open.
The adjustment is performed and the result is displayed.
OCSW
1 to 5

PD sensor detection level (Hexadecimal display)
The value in [ ] shows the threshold value. (Hexadecimal display)

For AB series, 1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, 1 to 4.
During execution of the simulation, EXECUTING is displayed.
41-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
40-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
PD1 to 5
Section
Item
Used to check the light reception level and the
detection level of the original size detection photo
sensor.
Others
Operation
Operation/procedure
The detection output level of each sensor is displayed in real time.
OCSW
The AD conversion value of manual feed width detection is displayed.

1 to 5

The value in [ ] shows the threshold value of 20 degree detection

adjustment. (Hexadecimal display)
41-4
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the detection level of OC 20 degrees.
Others
Operation
Operation/procedure
Set the OC cover at 20 degrees detection and press the [START] key.
Item
The detection output level of each sensor is displayed in real time.

OCSW
1 to 5

12
The value in [ ] shows the threshold value of 20 degree detection

adjustment. (Hexadecimal display)
13

14
During execution, [EXECUTING] is highlighted.
15
43
16
43-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
17
Used to set the fusing temperature.

Fixing (Fusing)
Operation
18
Operation/procedure
19
1. Touch the item to be set.

Item
10
11
Ready
Temp Main
(145)
Ready
Temp Sub
(145)
Ready
Temp Main
(122)
Ready
Temp Sub
(122)
WarmUp
Target Main
(145)
WarmUp
Target Sub
(145)
WarmUp
Target Main
(122)
WarmUp
Target Sub
(122)
WarmUp
Temp Main
(145)
WarmUp
Temp Sub
(145)
WarmUp
Temp Main
(122)
Content
Ready
temperature Main
(145mm/s)
Ready
temperature Sub
(145mm/s)
Ready
temperature Main
(122mm/s)
Ready
temperature Sub
(122mm/s)
Warmup target
temperature Main
(145mm/s)
Warmup target
temperature Sub
(145mm/s)
Warmup target
temperature Main
(122mm/s)
Warmup target
temperature Sub
(122mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Main
(145mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Sub
(145mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Main
(122mm/s)
Setting
range
Default
(North
America (Europe)
/Others)
20
21
150 220
185
190
22
150 220
180
185
23
150 220
175
180
24
150 220
170
175
150 220
180
190
150 220
180
190
150 220
Content
WarmUp
Temp Sub
(122)
600dpi
Main (145)
600dpi Sub
(145)
POST
CARD
Main (145)
POST
CARD Sub
(145)
CARDBOA
RD Main
(145)
CARDBOA
RD Sub
(145)
600dpi
Main (122)
600dpi Sub
(122)
CARDBOA
RD Main
(122)
POST
CARD Sub
(122)
POST
CARD
(122mm/s)
CARDBOA
RD Sub
(122)
Warmup
complete
temperature Sub
(122mm/s)
600dpi Main
(145mm/s)
600dpi Sub
(145mm/s)
Postcard Main
(145mm/s)
Postcard Sub
(145mm/s)
Thick paper Main
(145mm/s)
Thick paper Sub
(145mm/s)
600dpi Main
(122mm/s)
600dpi Sub
(122mm/s)
Postcard Main
(122mm/s)
Postcard Sub
(122mm/s)
Thick paper Main
(122mm/s)
Thick paper Sub
(122mm/s)
Setting
range
Default
(North
America (Europe)
/Others)
0 - 40
15
150 220
150 220
190
195
190
195
150 220
200
150 220
200
150 220
200
150 220
200
150 220
150 220
175
185
175
185
150 220
190
150 220
190
150 220
190
150 220
190
43-10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to set the paper feed cycle timing when printing
postcards.
Paper feed
Operation
Operation/procedure
175
150 220
170
0 - 40
10
Setting range
Default
1-99
50
44
44-1
0 - 40
15
0 - 40
10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to make various setups in each mode of process
control.
Image process
Operation
Operation/procedure
44-14
Item
ENVIRONMENT
1
ADJ.
Content
Environmental correction Allow/
Inhibit (0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
Duplex print correction Allow/
2 DUPLEX PRINT ADJ.
Inhibit (0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
Transfer current enviroment
ENVIROMENT ADJ
3
correction Allow/Innibit
(TC)
(0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check

(Display/Print)
Function
(Purpose)
Used to display the environment (temperature,

humidity) correction information.
Item
Operation
Default
Operation/procedure
0
44-2
Purpose
Setting
Function
(Purpose)
Drum life correction setting
Section
Image process (Photoconductor)
Item
Operation
The following data are displayed.

TH AREA
Current environment area
TMP DATA
Detection temperature of sensor (C)
HUD DATA
Detection humidity of sensor (%)
* The value before entry of SIM is displayed. (It is not revised in real
time.)
If sim entry is just after power turned on, the display value is all 0.
44-16
Operation/procedure
Purpose
Setting
1. Select an item with 10-key, and press [START] key.
Function
(Purpose)
Used to set the toner density control correction value.
Section
Image process
Item
Operation
2. Enter the setting value, and press [START] key.

Item
1
GRIDBIAS
ADJUST
Content
Drum life correction Disable/
Enable
(0: Disable, 1: Enable)
Default
1
Operation/procedure
Sets the toner density control correction value of the traveling distance
count.
44-3
Item
Purpose
Setting
Function
(Purpose)
Used to set the DV count correction.
Section
Image process
Item
Operation
Operation/procedure
1. Select an item with 10-key, and press [START] key.
2. Enter the setting value, and press [START] key.
Item
1
PR_LIFE_ADJUST
TN_LIFE_ADJUST
RATE_ADJUST
TONER_ADJUST
Content
DV count correction Disable/
Enable
Life of toner control DV
correction Disable/Enable
Printing rate correction
Disable/Enable
Toner unconditionally supply
correction Disable/Enable
Default
44-9
Purpose

(Display/Print)
Function
(Purpose)
Used to display the process control correction

information.
Section
Image process
Item
Operation
Operation/procedure
Used to display the process control correction information.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
0 - 93000
93001 - 186000
186001 - 279000
279001 - 372000
372001 - 465000
465001 - 857313
857314 - 1714625
1714626 - 2571938
2571939 - 3429250
3429251 - 4286563
4286564 - 5143875
5143876 - 6001188
6001189 - 6858500
6858501 - 7715813
7715814 - 8573125
8573126 - 9430438
9430439 - 10287750
10287751 - 11145063
11145064 - 12002375
12002376 0 - 93000
93001 - 186000
186001 - 279000
279001 - 372000
372001 - 465000
465001 - 857313
857314 - 1714625
1714626 - 2571938
2571939 - 3429250
3429251 - 4286563
4286564 - 5143875
5143876 - 6001188
6001189 - 6858500
6858501 - 7715813
7715814 - 8573125
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
Setting
range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
Default
50
50
50
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
50
50
50
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
Setting
range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
Item
36
37
38
39
40
8573126 - 9430438
9430439 - 10287750
10287751 - 11145063
11145064 - 12002375
12002376 -
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
Item
Default
45
45
45
45
45
6 +V1S-R (145)
7 +V2S-F (145)
8 +V2S-R (145)
44-17
9 +V1SS-F (145)
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

(Display/Print)
Used to display the toner density control reference
value.
Image process
Operation
10 +V1SS-R (145)
11 +V1SS-F (145)
12 +V1SS-R (145)
Operation/procedure
The following data are displayed. (The displayed value is the previous
print correction value.)
TARGET
DEV REF
LIFE
TH
Toner concentration control reference value

Developer adjustment value
Toner container life correction value (SIM 44-16)
Toner container environment correction value
TARGET = DEV REF+(LIFE-50)+(TH-50)

Developer adjustment value 128, life correction 60 (developer adjustment value plus 10), environment correction 45 (5 subtraction correction), rapid toner supply correction = 128+(60-50)+(45-50) = 133.)
13 +V1 THICK (145)

14 +V2 THICK (145)
+V1 THICK S
15
(145)
+V2 THICK S
16
(145)
17 +V1 THIN (145)
18 +V2 THIN (145)
19 +V1 THIN S (145)
44-34
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
20 +V2 THIN S (145)
Setting
Used to set the transfer current value in each mode.
21 +V1 LABEL (145)

22 +V2 LABEL (145)
Operation/procedure
23

To support an individual necessity in paper and the environment, it is
variable in the range of 5 to 30uA in the increment of 1uA in each mode.
24
When changing +V2, check with +V1 unchanged. If there is any trouble
in the half tone image of graphics, keep the relationship between +V1
and +V2 at the default and change it.
25
26
27
28
When the image quality is deteriorated because the user selects the
OHP mode and use other than the recommended OHP, decrease the
transfer current to adjust deterioration of black background picture quality. If some of characters are not printed, increase the transfer current.
This setting is changed in linkage with SIM 26-6 destination setting.
*1: SECL/SCA/SEF/EX inch series/EX AB series/EX inch series (FC)/
EX AB series (FC)/China/Taiwan/SEEG2
*2: SEC/SEEG/SUK
Item
1 +V1F (145)
2 +V1R (145)
3 +V2F (145)
4 +V2R (145)
5 +V1S-F (145)
Setting Default
range *1 *2
Content
145mm/s normal paper W
+V1 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
145mm/s normal paper N1
(Front)
29
30
31
32
+V1 LABEL S
(145)
+V2 LABEL S
(145)
+V1 OHP (145)
+V2 OHP(145)
+V1 OHP S (145)
+V2 OHP S (145)
+V1 POSTCARD
(145)
+V2 POSTCARD
(145)
+V1 POSTCARD
S (145)
+V2 POSTCARD
S (145)
33 +V1F (122)
5-30
34 +V1R (122)
5-30
35 +V2F (122)
5-30
18 20
36 +V2R (122)
5-30
14 18
37 +V1S-F (122)
5-30
38 +V1S-R (122)
Content
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
145mm/s thick paper > LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s thick paper t LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s thin paper > LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s thin paper t LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s label paper > LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s label paper t LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s OHP > LTR +V1
145mm/s OHP t LTR +V1
145mm/s postcard/envelope
> 100mm +V1
> 100mm +V2
t 100mm +V1
t 100mm +V2
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
Setting Default
range *1 *2
5-30
5-30
22
5-30
18
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-30
14
5-30
5-30
18
5-30
5-30
18
5-30
5-30
18
5-30
5-30
18
5-30
5-30
18
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-30
5
14
5
18
5-30
5-30
26
5-30
5-30
26
5-30
5-30
5-30
12 14
5-30
10
5-30
5-30
Item
39 +V2S-F (122)
40 +V2S-R (122)
41 +V1SS-F (122)
42 +V1SS-R (122)
43 +V2SS-F (122)
44 +V2SS-R (122)
45 +V1 THICK (122)
46 +V2 THICK (122)
+V1 THICK S
(122)
+V2 THICK S
48
(122)
47
49 +V1 THIN (122)

50 +V2 THIN (122)
51 +V1 THIN S (122)
52 +V2 THIN S (122)
53 +V1 LABEL (122)
54 +V2 LABEL (122)
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Setting Default
range *1 *2
Content
+V1 LABEL S
(122)
+V2 LABEL S
(122)
+V1 OHP (122)
+V2 OHP (122)
+V1 OHP S (122)
+V2 OHP S (122)
+V1 POSTCARD
(122)
+V2 POSTCARD
(122)
+V1 POSTCARD
S (122)
+V2 POSTCARD
S (122)

(Front)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V1
+V2
+V1
+V2
+V1
+V2
+V1
+V2
+V1
+V2
+V1
+V2
> 100mm +V1
> 100mm +V2
t 100mm +V1
t 100mm +V2
46
5-30
14
5-30
12
5-30
5-30
1. Touch the item to be adjusted. (Automatic adjustment)

5-30
14

5-30
12

Use the 10-key to set the exposure level.
5-30

Copying is started.
5-30
10
5-30
5-30
12
5-30
5-30
12
5-30
5-30
12
5-30
5-30
12
5-30
Purpose
5-30
12
Function
(Purpose)
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-30
5
8
5
12
5-30
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.

The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.
5-30
16

5-30

5-30
16

Copying is started.
46-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment
Used to set the exposure level in each exposure mode.
Picture quality
Density
Operation/procedure
(Exposure mode)
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Setting
Default
range
Content
AE
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
AE(TS)
TEXT(TS)
TEXT/PHOTO(TS)
AE
Character
Character/Photo
Photo
AE (TS)
Character (TS)
Character/Photo (TS)
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
1-99
50
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
* Except for AE and AE (TS), only Level 3 can be set.

Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
menu but the machine is not reset.
46-9
Item
Adjustment
(Text).
Picture quality
Density
Operation/procedure
(Exposure mode (Text))

Item
44-40
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
Used to set the time from the start of the main motor
rotation (Ready) to the start of toner supply in previous
rotation after turning on the power.
Operation/procedure
Set the toner supply previous rotation time.
Setting range
Default
1-99 (sec)
4 (sec)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.0 (SHIFT)
1.0 (GAMMA)
2.0 (SHIFT)
2.0 (GAMMA)
3.0 (SHIFT)
3.0 (GAMMA)
4.0 (SHIFT)
4.0 (GAMMA)
5.0 (SHIFT)
5.0 (GAMMA)
TS 1.0
11
(SHIFT)
1TS 1.0
12
(GAMMA)
TS 2.0
13
(SHIFT)
Content
Character level 1.0 (shift qty)
Character level 1.0 (slant)
Character (TS) level 1.0
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
Setting
range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
Default
22
44
36
47
50
50
61
55
72
60
1-99
22
1-99
44
1-99
36
Item
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Content
TS 2.0
(GAMMA)
TS 3.0
(SHIFT)
TS 3.0
(GAMMA)
TS 4.0
(SHIFT)
TS 4.0
(GAMMA)
TS 5.0
(SHIFT)
TS 5.0
(GAMMA)

(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
Setting
range
Default
1-99
47
16
1-99
50
17
1-99
50
18
1-99
61
1-99
55
1-99
72
1-99
60
19
20
Item
Content
TS 3.0
(GAMMA)
TS 4.0
(SHIFT)
TS 4.0
(GAMMA)
TS 5.0
(SHIFT)
TS 5.0
(GAMMA)
Character/Photo (TS) level 3.0

(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Purpose



Copying is started.

(Exposure mode (Photo))

Item

Copying is started.
(Exposure mode (Text/Photo))
2 1.0 (GAMMA)
3 2.0 (SHIFT)
4 2.0 (GAMMA)
5 3.0 (SHIFT)
6 3.0 (GAMMA)
7 4.0 (SHIFT)
8 4.0 (GAMMA)
9 5.0 (SHIFT)
10 5.0 (GAMMA)
11
12
13
14
15
TS 1.0
(SHIFT)
TS 1.0
(GAMMA)
TS 2.0
(SHIFT)
TS 2.0
(GAMMA)
TS 3.0
(SHIFT)
Setting
Default
range
Character/Photo level 1.0

(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
1-99
61
1-99
64
1-99
66


1 1.0 (SHIFT)
57
Operation/procedure

Content
1-99
Adjustment
(Photo).
Picture quality
Density
Operation/procedure
Item
50
46-11
Item
Adjustment
(Text/Photo).
Picture quality
1-99
Function
(Purpose)
46-10
Setting
Default
range
1-99
30
1-99
37
1-99
40
1-99
43
1-99
50
1-99
50
1-99
57
1-99
61
1-99
64
1-99
66
1-99
30
1-99
37
1-99
40
1-99
43
1-99
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Content
1.0(SHIFT)
1.0(GAMMA)
2.0(SHIFT)
2.0(GAMMA)
3.0(SHIFT)
3.0(GAMMA)
4.0(SHIFT)
4.0(GAMMA)
5.0(SHIFT)
5.0(GAMMA)
Photo level 1.0 (shift qty)

Photo level 1.0 (slant)
Setting
range
Default
1-99
16
50
33
50
50
50
56
61
62
66
46-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(1 mode automatic adjustment)
FAX
Image quality
Operation/procedure
1. Select 1: COPY START.
The currently set value is displayed beside the item.
2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key, and press
the [#/P] key.
Copying is started and the set value is stored.
Normal display
Error display
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
There is no tray selection operation.
46-15
The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.

Item
Setting range
Default
1 COPY START
2 FAX EXP.LEVEL
0-99
50
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(Super Fine mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality
Operation/procedure
46-13
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(Normal mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality
the [#/P] key.
Normal display
Operation/procedure
Error display
the [#/P] key.
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
Error display


Normal display
Item
Content
1
2
COPY START
EXP.LEVEL
AE (PHOTO ON)
AE (PHOTO OFF)
MANUAL
(PHOTO ON)
MANUAL
(PHOTO OFF)
Copy start
Exposure level selection
Super Fine AE
(Half tone)
Super Fine AE
Super Fine MANUAL
(Half tone)

1
2
3
4
Item
COPY START
EXP.LEVEL
AE
MANUAL
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
Content
Setting range
Copy start

Normal text AE
0-99
Normal text MANUAL
Default
5
6
50
Setting
range
0-99
Default
50
Super Fine MANUAL
Note:Executable only when the FAX is installed.

46-16
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
46-14
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(Fine text mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
the [#/P] key.
the [#/P] key.
Normal display
Error display
Error display
5
6
COPY START
EXP.LEVEL
AE (PHOTO ON)
AE (PHOTO OFF)
MANUAL
(PHOTO ON)
MANUAL
(PHOTO OFF)
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
1
2
3
4

Normal display
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
Item
Adjustment
(Ultra Fine mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality
Content
Copy start
Fine text AE (Half tone)
Fine text AE
Fine text MANUAL
(Half tone)
Fine text MANUAL
Setting
Default
range
0-99
50

Setting
Item
Content
range
1 COPY START
Copy start
2 EXP.LEVEL
3 AE (PHOTO ON)
Ultra Fine AE (Half tone)
4 AE (PHOTO OFF) Ultra Fine AE
MANUAL
Ultra Fine MANUAL
0-99
5
(PHOTO ON)
(Half tone)
MANUAL
Ultra Fine MANUAL
6
(PHOTO OFF)

Default
50
46-20
46-18
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Used to adjust inclination for each exposure mode.

Picture quality
Adjustment
Used to set the exposure correction value of SPF/
RSPF for OC exposure.
Picture quality
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure

The adjustment item and the current set value are highlighted.



1
2

Set the exposure level with the 10-key.
Copying is started.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Setting
Default
range
Content
AE
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
AE(TS)
TEXT(TS)
AE
Character
Character/Photo
Photo
AE(TS)
Character (TS)
Character/Photo
7 TEXT/PHOTO(TS)
(TS)
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
1-99
50
Level 3.0
Used to set the control method of the exposure mode.
3. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to
the original state (adjustment item selection menu).
Setting
(Toner save).

If SIM 26-6 (Destination setup) and SIM46-19 (Auto exposure mode)
are changed, this setup is also changed to the default value accordingly.
Item
AE
AE(TS)
Setting range
Default
0-31
Item
AE MODE
(1:EXPOSURE
2:TONER)
AE STOP(COPY)
(0:FIXED
1:REAL TIME)
AE STOP(FAX)
(0:FIXED
1:REAL TIME)
AE STOP(SCAN)
(0:FIXED
1:REAL TIME)
PHOTO MODE
46-31
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Picture quality

The display is shifted to the adjustment value entry menu.
53
Adjustment

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
1
2
Operation/procedure
Default
1-99
Level 3.0
46-19
Setting range
Operation/procedure
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Content
SPF
RSPF
46-30
(Auto adjustment)
Item
Item
SPF EXPOSURE
RSPF EXPOSURE
Content
Auto exposure mode*
(1: Priority on Image quality,
2: Priority on toner consumption)
Auto exposure STOP mode
(COPY)
(0: Fixed, 1: Real-time)
Auto exposure STOP mode (FAX)
Auto exposure STOP mode
(SCANNER)
Photo mode
(1: ED (Error diffusion) , 2: DT (Dither))
Default
2
Setting
(Toner save).
Operation/procedure
1
2
3
4
Item
AE
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
Setting range
Default
0-2
46-39
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
Used to switch the FAX send image quality.

0
2
Item
0
HAIRLINE
PRINTER
Content
Original with pencil lines
and thin lines
Printed original
* Auto exposure mode

When SIM 26-6 (Destination setup) is changed from EX Japan to
Japan, the setup value becomes 1 (Default: Japan). If, on the contrary, it is changed from Japan to EX Japan, the set value becomes 2
(Default: EX Japan)
If the auto exposure mode setup value is changed, the setup value of
SIM 46-30 (AE limit setup) is reset to the default value.
Setting range
Default
0-1
48-3
48
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
48-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the copy mode magnification ratio
(main scanning direction, sub scanning direction).
Image processing
Picture quality
Operation/procedure
1. The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
Operation/procedure
Changes magnification ratio by changing speed of main motor.

The change of the paper transfer speed is 0.1% when changing value
is 1.

3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density, and enter the
adjustment value with the 10-key.
Copying is started.
Item
Setting
range
Content
F-R
SCAN
SPF (SIDE1)
SPF (SIDE2)
DUPLEX
Main scanning magnification

ratio adjustment
Sub scanning magnification
ratio adjustment
RSPF surface sub scan
magnification ratio
RSPF back surface sub scan
magnification ratio
DUPLEX sub scanning
Adjustment
Used to adjust the print mode magnification ratio
correction.
Image processing
Picture quality
Default
50
60
1-99
1
2
Item
Content
Setting
range
Default
145mm/s
122mm/s
Main motor speed (145mm/s)

Main motor speed (122mm/s)
45-55
50
48-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Related soft SW
Adjustment
FAX magnification adjustment (read)
FAX
SW112-1 to 8, SW113-1 to 8
Operation/procedure
50

The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.
2. Enter the set value of magnification with the 10-key, and press the
[#/P] key.
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the initial menu, but the machine is not reset.

Normal display
48-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the scanner mode magnification ratio
(main/sub scanning direction).
Image processing
Picture quality
Error display
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
There is no operation of tray selection.

Operation/procedure
Even when the SPF/RSPF is selected, if there is no original on the

SPF/RSPF, the OC is scanned.

Even when the OC is selected, if there is any original on the SPF/

RSPF, the SPF/RSPF is scanned. (Setting 2)

Item
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density, and enter the
adjustment value with the 10-key.
Copying is started.
Item
1
F-R
SCAN
SPF (SIDE1)
SPF (SIDE2)
1
2
Setting
range
Content
Main scanning magnification
ratio adjustment
Sub scanning magnification
ratio adjustment
RSPF surface sub scan
magnification ratio
RSPF back surface sub scan
magnification ratio
1-99
Default
50
COPY START
SCAN SELECT
(OC/SPF/RSPF)
OC(MAIN)
OC(SUB)
SPF(MAIN)
SPF(SUB)
RSPF(MAIN)
RSPF(SUB)
Content
Copy start
Scan selection
(OC/ SPF/RSPF)
SCAN Main scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (OC)
SCAN Sub scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (OC)
SCAN Main scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (SPF)
SCAN Sub scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (SPF)
SCAN Main scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (RSPF)
SCAN Sub scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (RSPF)
Setting
range
Default
1-255*
128
1-255*
128
1-255*
128
1-255*
128
1-255*
128
1-255*
128
1-255*
128
* The adjustment can be made in the range of 12.7% - +12.7% by

the increment of 0.1%.
(Adjustment procedure)
1. Note down the adjustment value of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4), and
change the value to 99.
2. Set SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) to 1. (By setting to 1, there is no void.)
48-9
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
3. Place a chart with a clear lead edge (or a ruler) on the OC document table.
Adjustment
FAX magnification adjustment (print)
FAX
4. Use SIM 50-1 (Item 1) to execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed. (1 - 99: About
0.127mm/Step)
Operation/procedure
5. Reset the adjustment values of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4) to the

original values, and execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed on the lead edge of
paper. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step).

Normal display
Error display
6. Adjust SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) so that the lead edge void on the
print out is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
7. Similar to procedure 6, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 6, 7) so that the rear

edge void is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
8. Similar to procedure 6, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 8, 9) so that the left
edge void is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
There is no operation of tray selection.
9. Make an enlargement copy (400%), and check that there is no

shade of the cabinet printed at the lead edge.

When two pages are scanned, duplex printing is made.
Item
Content
1 COPY START Copy start

Print magnification ratio
2 Horizontal
adjustment (Horizontal, vertical
to paper passing)
3 Vertical
adjustment (Vertical, parallel to
paper passing)
Horizontal
adjustment on the back surface
4
(DUPLEX)
(Horizontal, vertical to paper
passing)
adjustment on the back surface
Vertical
5
(Vertical, parallel to paper
(DUPLEX)
passing)
Setting
Default
range
1-255
128
1-255
128
1-255
128
128
50
50-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Item
128
1-255
1-255
10. If there is a shade printed at the lead edge in procedure 9, adjust

SIM 50-1 (Item 10). (1 - 5: About 0.677mm)
* If there is no problem, set to 2.
Adjustment
Content
RRC-A
DEN-A
DEN-A-MANUAL
DEN-A -OPTION
DEN-A -DUPLEX
DEN-B
DEN-B-DUP
SIDE VOID
SIDE VOID-DUP
Used to adjust the copy lead edge position.

10 LOSS(OC)
Picture quality
Image position
Original scan start position

adjustment
Lead edge position
adjustment value (OC)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment (Main tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment (Manual feed
tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment (Option tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment (back of the
machine)
(Duplex)
(First print surface)
(Duplex)
Image loss amount
adjustment (Lead edge
image loss set value) (OC)
Setting
Default
range
1-99
43
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-99
30
1-99
50
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-5
Operation/procedure
50-5
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key.,
The display goes to the copy menu.
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
state and print is started.
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
(When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)
Adjustment
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin) on
the print paper in the print mode.
Picture quality
Print area
Operation/procedure

Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.
Copying is started.


4. Select the scanning method.

Copying is started.
Item
Content
Setting range Default
1 TRAY1
1st tray
0-99
2 OPTION
Option tray
53
3 MANUAL
Manual feed
1-99
4 DUPLEX
Back print
50-6
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin) on
print paper in the copy mode. (RSPF)
Picture quality
Image position
Operation/procedure
Even when the SPF/RSPF is selected, if there is no original on the

SPF/RSPF, the OC is scanned.
Even when the OC is selected, if there is any original on the SPF/
RSPF, the SPF/RSPF is scanned. (Setting 2)
Item
Content
1 COPY START Copy start

SCAN
Scan selection (1: OC,
2 SELECT (OC/
2: SPF, 3: RSPF back)
SPF/RSPF)
Scan lead edge position
3 LEAD
adjustment value of the
selected method in 2.
Scan left edge position
4 LEFT
Scan rear edge position
5 REAR
Scan right edge position
6 RIGHT
Setting
range
Default
1-3
43-57
50
43-57
50
43-57
50
43-57
50

50-9

Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section

Adjustment
FAX lead edge adjustment (print)
FAX

Copying is started.
Operation/procedure

Item
Content
Surface original scan start

position adjustment
Back original scan start
2 SIDE2
position set
3 END EDGE
(RSPF)
Surface image loss quantity
4 LOSS(SIDE1)
set
5 LOSS(SIDE2)
Back image loss quantity set
Surface rear edge image
6 REARLOS(SIDE1)
loss quantity set
Back rear edge image loss
7 REARLOS(SIDE2)
quantity set
1 SIDE1
Setting
range
Default
1-99
50
1-99
50
1-99
50
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
50-8

Copying is started.
Normal display
Error display

When two pages are scanned, duplex print is made,
1 COPY START
Setting
Default
range
43-57
53
43-57
53
43-57
53
43-57
53
43-57
53
43-57
53
Item
The adjustments on the machine side must have been normally

completed.
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Adjustment
FAX lead edge adjustment (read)
FAX
Operation/procedure
2. Enter the correction value with the 10-key, and press the [#/P] key.
Copying is started.
Normal display
Error display
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
Content
Copy start
Print lead edge void
LEAD
adjustment value
(Front surface)
Print left edge void
LEFT
adjustment value
(Front surface)
Print rear edge void
REAR
adjustment value
(Front surface)
Print lead edge void
LEAD
adjustment value
(DUPLEX)
(Back surface)
Print left edge void
LEFT (DUPLEX) adjustment value
(Back surface)
Print rear edge void
REAR
adjustment value
(DUPLEX)
(Back surface)

50-10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
51
Adjustment
(Adjustment can be made for each paper feed
section.)
Image processing (ICU)
Picture quality
Image position
51-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Operation/procedure
Section

Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
DUPLEX
Content
Manual paper feed
1st tray
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
Back print
Setting range
Item
145mm/s
122mm/s
Setting range
Default
1-99
50
51-2
Purpose
Default
Function
(Purpose)
1-99
Image process
Operation

1
2

Copying is started.
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation pawl ON time.
Operation/procedure

Adjustment
50
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto the
resist roller in each section (copier paper feed section,
duplex paper feed section, RSPF paper feed section).
(When the print image position varies greatly for the
paper or when a lot of paper jam troubles occur, the
adjustment is required.)
Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
Operation
Operation/procedure
50-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(Adjustment can be made for each document mode.)
Image processing
Picture quality
Image position
Operation/procedure
Copying is started.

Copying is started.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
DUPLEX
SPF(SIDE1)
SPF(SIDE2)
Content
Manual feed
1st tray
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
Back print
RSPF front surface
RSPF back surface
Setting range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
Default
50
50
50
50
50
70
50
50
1
Item
OC
SPF(SIDE1)
SPF(SIDE2)
Content
OC document scan
RSPF document front
surface scan
RSPF document back
surface scan
Setting range
1-99
Default
50
51-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to set the OPC drum separation pawl operation
inhibit. (ON/OFF)
Image process
Operation
Operation/procedure
Select the set value with the 10-key.
0
1
Item
ON
OFF
Content
Enable
Disable
Setting range
Default
0-1
51-9
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation voltage ON/
OFF timing.
Process (OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
Operation
1
2
3
4
Item
MAX POSITION
POSITION 1
POSITION 2
MIN POSITION
Purpose

Content
SHV ON
SHV OFF
Separation voltage ON timing

* Transfer V2ON reference
(Synchronized with the
adjustment value of 50.)
Separation voltage OFF timing
* Transfer V2OFF reference
(Synchronized with the
adjustment value of 50.)
Setting
range
Default
25-90
50
50-90
75
Section
0-999
Function
(Purpose)
Adjustment
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position of the mirror
unit automatically. For the RSPF scan position
automatic adjustment, the mirror unit is shifted to
11mm before the RSPF glass cover edge, and is
operated automatically to scan images by the unit of 1
step, detecting the position up to the glass cover
automatically.
With the RSPF or the OC cover open, put a black background chart on
the OC glass (the RSPF glass surface is included for the RSPF standard model), and press the [START] key.
If the adjustment is executed normally, the adjustment value is displayed and saved in the EEPROM. If an error occurs, ERR is displayed and the value is not saved in the EEPROM.
If the adjustment is not performed because of abnormality, --- is displayed.
During execution of the adjustment, the operation cannot be interrupted.
53-6
Function
(Purpose)
Default
Operation/Procedure
53
Purpose
Setting range
53-8
Operation/Procedure
Item
Content
Max. width
Adjustment point 1
Adjustment point 2
Min. width
Adjustment
Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF width.
The adjustment method is the 4-point system. Set the
guide to Max. (A3/WLetter) position, A4R/Letter R
position, A5R/Invoice R position, and Min. position for
adjustment.
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
53-9
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Adjustment
RSPF read position adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Press [START] key.
Item
Read position adjustment
(Max. position setting)
Setting range
1-99
Default
50
1. Set the guide to the maximum position, and press the [START] key.
Set WLetter and fit the guide, and press the [START] key.
2. Set A4R/Letter R and fit the guide, and press the [START] key.
3. Set A5R/Invoice R and fit the guide, and press the [START] key.
4. Set the guide to the minimum position, and press the [START] key.
5. Set the paper recognition width (+), and press the [START] key.
6. Set the paper recognition width (),and press the [START] key.
If FAILED is displayed in the above procedure 1, 2, 3, or 4, repeat the
adjustment.
If the middle position adjustment is not required, press the [START] key
without changing the guide position.
Middle position
adjustment S
YES
NO
YES
NO
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Adjustment
RSPF exp adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1. Press [START] key.
(Middle position L/S setting)
Middle position
adjustment L
53-10
MID-L ADJ.ON
MID-L ADJ.OFF
MID-S ADJ.ON
MID-S ADJ.OFF
1
2
Item
SPF EXPOSURE
RSPF EXPOSURE
Setting range
Default
1-99
53
55
53-7
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Adjustment
Used to enter the RSPF width detection adjustment
value.
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
55-1
Purpose
Setting
Function
(Purpose)
Used to set the soft switch.
Section
Operation

Operation/Procedure
2. Enter the RSPF original tray size adjustment value (specified on

the back of the RSPF) with the 10-key.
The bit to be changed is specified by 10-key. (The current value is highlighted.)
Used to enter the number of SW to be changed.
When [START] key is pressed, the entered value is set.

61

Copying is started.
61-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the LSU (polygon motor) operation.
Check speed can select 145mm/s or 122mm/s
individually.
LSU
Operation
Operation/procedure
Press the [START] key, and the LSU test is performed.
Used to set the LSU to ON state and check that the sync signal
(HSYNC/) is outputted or not.
After operation for 30 sec, the result is displayed. (Interruption cannot
be made for 5 sec after starting the operation.)
* If the IMC board is not installed, the key inputs cannot be made.
63
63-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

(display/print)
Used to check the result of shading correction.
(The shading correction data are displayed.)
Scanner (Exposure)
Operation
Operation/procedure
Pressing the [START] key performs shading, and displays the result
(center pixel).
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
65
65-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Adjustment
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section)
detection position.
Operation (Display, Operation)
Operation/Procedure
Press the keys displayed on the LCD sequentially.
Adjust the touch panel coordinates.
63-7
Purpose
During execution of the print test, the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and
the [INTERRUPTION] key are invalid.
Setting
Default
Item
Content
range
Self print is made in 2 by 4 mode
(printing 2 lines and not printing
4 lines). Since scanning is not
2 BY 4
1
performed, when the original is
MODE
set on the RSPF, this cannot be
1-2
1
performed.
* Duplex print cannot be made.
Lattice print (1cm, 1dot width
LATTICE
WLT, A3 print (A3 main scan,
2
PRINT
WLT sub scan)) is performed.
* Duplex print can be made.
Adjustment
Used to adjust the RSPF white correction start pixel
position automatically.
This adjustment is performed after the lens unit is
replaced.
Scanner
Operation
Operation/procedure
Lift the RSPF unit to the fully open position, and press the [START] key.
[ ] indicates the order number of the pixel of the white sheet for RSPF
exposure correction in the RSPF position.
If the adjustment is normally completed, COMPLETE is displayed
and data are written into the EEPROM.
In case of an abnormality, ERROR is displayed and no data is written
into the EEPROM.
The RSPF white correction start pixel = Displayed pixel position 34
If the simulation is executed with the RSPF unit closed, an error will
result.
When the point of + on the LCD is pressed, it turns gray. Press all the
four points of +.
65-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Check the touch panel coordinates.
When the touch panel is pressed, the X-coordinate and the Y-coordinate (dot conversion values) are displayed.
65-5
Purpose
64
Function
(Purpose)
Section
64-1
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output check

(Display, Print)
Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section)
detection position adjustment result.
Operation (Display, Operation)
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output check

(Display, Print)
Used to check the key inputs of the operation panel.
Operation (screen/operation)
Operation/procedure
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the printer function
(auto print operation).
Printer
Operation
Check the key input of the operation panel.

After completion of all key entries, COMPLETE is displayed.
Operation/procedure
1. Select the print item with the 10-key.
66
66-3
66-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Setting
Used to change and check the FAX-related soft SW.
Operation/procedure
FAX
Press the [START] key.
FAX PWB memory check
FAX
Operation
Read/write can be checked for FAX PWB memory.
Operation/procedure
1. Enter the soft SW number to be selected with the 10-key.
2. Check and change the setting content of the selected soft SW.
3. Press the [START] key to save the set content.
The FAX-related soft SW is displayed on the LCD, and changing can
be made by monitoring it.
The check result is displayed separately for each memory.

1. Memory to be checked
DRAM
SRAM
Program area
Flash ROM
SUM check only
Memory area
The memory size follows the

automatically detected value.
Option memory
66-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
PAGE
Adjustment
Used to clear the FAX-related soft SW.
(Except for the FAX adjustment values)
FAX
Operation/procedure
MODEM
2. Detailed procedure
55H is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the
address data are read in sequence to check that they were
properly written.
AAH is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the
properly written.
00H is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the
properly written.
Perform checks 1 - 3 sequentially. If there is no abnormality, it is
OK. If there is any abnormality, NG is notified to the error
address.
The check result is saved. New result is overwrited with each
check.
1. Enter the country code with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
2. When 1: (YES) is selected, the soft SW corresponding to the
country code is cleared. When 2: (NO) is selected, the simulation
is canceled.
Country code
Japan
: 00000000
U.S.A.
: 10110101
Australia
: 00001001
U.K.
: 10110100
France
: 00111101
4
5
Germany
: 00000100
Interruption cannot be made during operation.
Sweden
: 10100101
New Zealand : 01111110

China
: 00100110
Singapore
: 10011100
Taiwan
: 11111110
India
: 01010011
Malaysia
: 01101100
Hong Kong
: 01010000
Middle east
: 11111101
SouthAfrica
: 10011111
Operation/procedure
Spain
: 10100000
Select the signal number with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
The signal is sent to the line and the machine speaker. (Sending the
signal is continued until the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed.)
Portugal
: 10001011
Russia
: 10111000
Denmark
: 00110001
Norway
: 10000010
Switzerland
: 10100110
Italy
: 01011001
Belgium
: 00001111
66-4
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Signal send mode (Signal send level: Max.)

FAX
Operation
By entering the signal number and pressing the [START] key during
execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Luxembourg : 01101001
Netherlands : 01111011
Finland
: 00111100
The codes other than the above are accepted as Japan.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Item
NO SIGNAL
33.6 V34
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
Send signal
Signal not sent
33.6 V34
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Item
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
0.3 FLG
CED2100
CNG1100
0.3 V21
ANSam
31 RINGER
32 No MSG
33 No RBT
34 DP MAKE
35 DP BRK
Send signal
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
7EH Flag signal
Tone signal
Signal number
16 14.4 V33
17 12.0 V33
18 14.4 V17
19 12.0 V17
20 9.6 V17
21 7.2 V17
22 9.6 V29
23 7.2 V29
24 4.8 V27t
25 2.4 V27t
26 0.3 FLG
27 CED2100
28 CNG1100
29 0.3 V21
30 ANSam
31 RINGER
Pseudo-ringer sound
([ON HOOK] key ON)
Voice message (no sound)
Under the state where the ring back tone can be
sent to the line, keep the sound composition IC
volume to 0.
Ring back tone (no sound)
sent to the line, keep the G/A volume to 0.
Dial pulse (make)
Maintain the make state with keeping the condition
to be able to send to the dial pulse line.
Dial pulse (break)
Maintain the break state with keeping the condition
32 No MSG
33 No RBT
34 DP MAKE
35 DP BRK
Send signal
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
7EH Flag signal
Tone signal
Pseudo-ringer sound
([ON HOOK] key ON)
Voice message (no sound)
sent to the line, keep the sound composition IC
volume to 0.
Ring back tone (no sound)
sent to the line, keep the G/A volume to 0.
Dial pulse (make)
Maintain the make state with keeping the condition
Dial pulse (break)
Maintain the break state with keeping the condition

66-6
66-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Signal send mode (Signal send level soft SW setting)
FAX
Operation
By setting the signal number, signals are sent to the line and the
machine speaker. (Sending signals is continued until interruption command is made (by pressing [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.)
By entering the signal number and pressing the [START] key during
execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Send signal
Signal not sent
33.6 V34
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
Data output, check

Printing the confidential password
FAX
Data
Confidential/Pass code
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
Signal number
1 NO SIGNAL
2 33.6 V34
3 31.2 V34
4 28.8 V34
5 26.4 V34
6 24.0 V34
7 21.6 V34
8 19.2 V34
9 16.8 V34
10 14.4 V34
11 12.0 V34
12 9.6 V34
13 7.2 V34
14 4.8 V34
15 2.4 V34
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
The confidential ID table (confidential BOX numbers, confidential BOX

names, and confidential password) is printed.
The confidential data of My company mode is printed separately.
66-7
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Data output, check

Print the screen memory contents
FAX
Data
Image data
Operation/procedure
Used to input all image data (including confidential reception data,
remote send image, not-sent image) stored in image memory of the
FAX section.
The output image is remained even after outputting.
66-13
66-10
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Image data memory clear
FAX
Data
Image data
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to register the dial numbers.
FAX
Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key and press the [START] key. (When 2:
NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
Enter the number with the 10-key, [*] key, and [#] key.
Used to clear all image data (including confidential reception data)

stored in image memory of the FAX section.
Press the [START] key to register the entered number.
The management table is also cleared (initialized) at the same time.

* lIf there is any print data, the power must be turned off after clearing.

66-14
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
66-11
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Press the [CLEAR] key to return to the initial state.
FAX
Operation
Operation check/test
FAX
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1. Select the item with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
Operation/procedure
2. Set the make time with the 10-key.
The dial is sent with the set value + 26ms.
By setting the signal number, the specified signal is delivered to the

line at the speed of 300bps. (The signal is continuously sent until the
interruption command is provided by pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.)
The sending dial cannot be interrupted.
The signal send level can be selected from 0dB or the soft SW set value.
The signal send level is returned to the soft SW set value before execution of the mode after completion of the mode.
By entering the number and pressing the [START] key during execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Item
1 NO SIGNAL
2 11111
3 11110
4 00000
5 010101
6 00001
0
1
Item
EXECUTE
MAKE TIME
Content
Execution
Dial pulse make time setting
Setting range
0-15

66-15
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
FAX
Operation
Operation/Procedure
2. Set the make time with the 10-key.
The dial is sent with the set value + 26ms.
66-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW)
FAX
Operation
0
1
Item
EXECUTE
MAKE TIME
Content
Execution
Dial pulse make time setting
Setting range
0-15
Operation/procedure
By setting the signal number, the specified signal is delivered to the
line at the speed of 300bps. (The signal is continuously sent until the
interruption command is provided by pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.)
The signal send level can be selected from 0dB or the soft SW set value.
66-16
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to perform the dial test. (DTFM signal send test)
FAX
Operation
The signal send level is returned to the soft SW set value before execution of the mode after completion of the mode.
Operation/Procedure
By entering the number and pressing the [START] key during execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Item
1 NO SIGNAL
2 11111
3 11110
4 00000
5 010101
6 00001
Item
0
1
2
EXECUTE
HIGH (SW)
HIGH-LOW (SW)

Content
Execution
High group
High group, Low group
Setting
range
0-15
0-15
3. Select the soft SW reflection.

1
2
Item
NO STORE TO SW
STORE TO SW
66-21
Content
Not reflected.
Reflected. (Shift SW value changed.)
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Check
FAX information print
FAX
Data
Operation/procedure
66-17
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
1. Select the item to be printed.

FAX
Operation

The information of the selected item is printed.
1
2
Item
USER SW.LIST
SOFT SW.LIST
SYSTEM ERROR
PROTOCOL
PARTIAL SRAM
CLEAR
Operation/procedure
Enter the DTFM signal (1 digit (1 to 9, 0, *, #)) and press the [START] key.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the
simulation is terminated.
66-18
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW.)
FAX
Operation
Content
User setting list
Soft SW list
System error list
Used to print the system error log (error
number and time).
Protocol error list
Regardless of soft SW38-1 status, the
protocol monitor of the preceding
communication is printed. (Printing is
allowed at any time before starting the
next communication.) For this operation,
the protocol monitor of one
communication is always buffered.
Used to clear the SRAM.
Operation/Procedure
Enter the DTFM signal (1 digit (1 to 9, 0, *, #)) and press the [START] key.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the
simulation is terminated.
66-19
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Back up
Used to write the SRAM data to the Flash ROM.
66-22
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Handset sound volume adjustment (Japan only)
FAX
Operation
Operation/procedure
1. Select the sound volume to be set.
(MAX: Large, MIDDLE: Medium, MIN: Small)
FAX
Data
2. Press [START] key.
Operation/Procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. The data
are backed up. (When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
Selection of 1, 2, and 3 can be made even during execution of the simulation.

A sound is generated during execution of the simulation.
* The AR-FX5 data cannot be written into the AR-FX7. If it is executed, data are initialized and deleted. In addition, the AR-FX7 data
cannot be used in the AR-FX5.
Note: Execution is possible only when FAX is installed.
66-24
66-20
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Back up
Used to write the Flash ROM data to the SRAM.
FAX
Data
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the FAST storage data. (SEC only)
FAX
Data
Initializing
Operation/procedure
Operation/Procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. The Flash
ROM data are read out and written into the SRAM. (When 2: NO is
selected, the simulation is canceled.)
Select 1: YES with the 10-key and press the [START] key. The FAST
storage data are cleared. (When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is
canceled.)
* The AR-FX5 data cannot be written into the AR-FX7. If it is executed, data are initialized and deleted. In addition, the AR-FX7 data
cannot be used in the AR-FX5.
Operation/procedure
66-30
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
FAX
Operation
Operation/procedure
When the relay state of the polarity reverse relay, the handset hook
switch, or the external telephone hook switch is changed, the content
of change is displayed regardless of the soft SW setup (real time). The
display of change is kept until an interruption command is supplied by
pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Item
HS2
HS1
RHS
EXHS
Notification contents
Signal low
Signal high
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

66-31
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
FAX
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1. Enter the set value. (Valid only 1 to 5)
2. The entered bit is alternatively switched between 0 and 1 and
the target signal name is highlighted.
The send/receive test is performed, and the time required for send/
receive of the image data in the test is measured and displayed.
Setup on the user
side when executing
communication
Measuring
range
Send
Receive
Mode when measuring

How to check the time
Measuring unit
Communication
: Memory send
means
: Normal Character
Picture quality
: Lighter
Density
: ON
ECM
: OFF
Sender information
From flag reception before sending of image
data until sending of RCP frame
From flag reception before reception of
image data until reception of RCP frame
Used to make communication not in a
simulation process but in the normal screen
and measure the time.
Enter the simulation for communication time
check and check the time.
msec
When there are two or more send/receive operations of image data in

one communication, only the time of the last send/receive data near
the end is measured.
66-37
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Speaker sound volume adjustment
FAX
Operation/procedure
3. Press the [START] key to send the signal.
The following test sound is delivered to the line and the speaker to
adjust the sound kind and volume.
When the [CUSTUM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
The send level to the line is the set value of soft SW.
The set values of the selected sound kind and volume are written to
each soft SW.
1. Sound kinds pattern
66-32
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Receive data check
FAX
Operation
Operation/procedure
The fixed data received from the line are checked and the result is displayed.
When data are coincident, OK is displayed. When not, NG is displayed.
66-33
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Sound kinds (Test sound)

RINGER
Call sound
Line monitor sound (Test
LINE MONITO sound: communication
signal sound)
On-hook (Test sound,
ON HOOK
communication signal
sound)
SCAN FINISH Scan finish sound
Communication finish
TX/RX FINISH
sound
DTMF
DTFM send sound
Sound volume set value

DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.

DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
LAR: (MED. Value + 1)
Signal detection check
FAX
Operation
MED: (SMA value +1) - (LAR value 1)

SMA: 1 - (MED. Value + 1)
2. Sound volume pattern
Operation/Procedure
Signal detection is checked and the result is displayed.
66-34
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Communication time measurement display
FAX
Operation
66-41
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
CI signal check
Operation/procedure
When the [START] key is pressed, the call signal from CI pin is
detected to deliver the call sound to the line and the speaker. The volume of call sound follows the soft SW.
Signal detection and delivery of pseudo-call sound at detection are
executed until the interruption command is provided by pressing the
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
3. Press the [CA] key to cancel the simulation and reset.
66-52
Purpose
Section
Item
Function
(Purpose)
Operation test/check (Japan only)

FAX
Operation
Pseudo-ringer check
Operation/procedure
Press [START] key.
The call sound of the machine and the pseudo-ring are generated.
(Processing state)
RECEIVE
ERASE
WRITE
VERIFY
* Execution of the simulation which performs communication with the

PCL board is inhibited until Notice Page storage is completed. (Only
when the serviceman call error occurs.)
* In the other case than the serviceman call error, entering the simulation is inhibited during the system check operation is displayed.
67
67-15
67-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
(Flash Device)
PROGRAM
BOOTROM
PS KANJI FONT
ESC/P KANJI FONT
OPTION FONT
Used to execute read/write check of the RAM on the
PCL board, and to display the result.
Printer
Operation
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the validity of the ROM on the PCL
board and the result is displayed.
Printer
Operation
Operation/Procedure
Operation/procedure
Read/write check of the RAM on the PCL board is performed and the
result is displayed.
Each ROM on the PCL board is checked and the result is displayed.
The presence of DIMM is detected. If there is no DIMM, --- is displayed.

If there is, read/write check is performed and the result is displayed.
The display of --- is changed to CHECKING, OK, or NG according to the message number included in the continuation command.
When the simulation is completed normally, COMPLETE is displayed.
(No display for abnormal completion.)
Since only the devices installed to the PCL board are checked when
the simulation is started, the display may not be changed from ---.
(No message is sent for an uninstalled device.)
Key operations on each display
(Initial display)
Pressing the [INTERRUPT] key shifts the display to the previous menu.
Pressing the [CA] key leads to resetting. Pressing the [C] key, and the
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is invalid. (Beep sound)
(Display during execution)
During execution, the [INTERRUPT] key, [C] key, and the [CA] key are
invalid. (Beep sound). The [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key produces a valid
sound only.
(Check end display)
The display of --- is changed to CHECKING, OK, or NG according to the message number included in the continuation command.
Since only the devices installed to the PCL board are checked when
the simulation is started, the display may not be changed from ---.
(No message is sent for an uninstalled device.)
Key operations on each display
(Initial display)
Pressing the [INTERRUPT] key shifts the display to the previous menu.
Pressing the [CA] key leads to resetting. The [C] key and the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key are invalid. (Beep sound).
(Execution display)
During execution, the [INTERRUPT] key, the [C] key, and the [CA] key
are invalid. (Beep sound). Pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key produces a valid sound only.
(Check end display)
After execution, the [INTERRUPT] key and the [C] key are invalid.
(Beep sound). Pressing the [CA] key leads to resetting. Pressing the
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key produces a valid sound only.
After execution, the [INTERRUPT] key and the [C] key are invalid.
(Beep sound). Pressing the [CA] key leads to resetting. The [SYSTEM
SETTINGS] key produces a valid sound only.
After completion of the simulation, reset the machine.
After completion of the simulation, reset the machine.
67-17
67-14
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Flash ROM version up

Used to check write/comparison of flash programs.
Operation/procedure
The confirmation dialogue is displayed.
Printer
Operation
2. Select 1: YES with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
1: YES (Cleared)
Operation/procedure
PLEASE SEND DATA is displayed.
2. Data are sent from the PC (MS-DOS) by use of fcopy command
(FCOPY: file name). (Refer the [7] FLASH ROM VERSION UP
PROCEDURE)
Used to overwrite and check the flash device while displaying its
process status.
After completion, the result is displayed.
Data clear
Used to clear the printer section setting.
(NVRAM clear)
If there is no abnormality after Clear operation, COMPLETE is displayed. If there is any abnormality, ERROR is displayed.
Note: Executable only when the PCL is installed.
67-18
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Data clear
Used to clear the data area for FLASH ROM Network
Scanner Application.
Operation/procedure
The confirmation dialogue is displayed.
2. Select 1: YES with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
1: YES (Cleared)
If there is no abnormality after Clear operation, COMPLETE is displayed. If there is any abnormality, ERROR is displayed.
Note: Executable only when the PCL is installed.
67-20
Function
(Purpose)
Used to check the network connection when the

scanner option is installed.
Operation/procedure
The network scanner is checked.
PLEASE SEND DATA and READY are displayed. (When the
PCL board is installed, it takes some time to display READY.)
2. Boot ftp from MS-DOS.
Data are sent from the PC by the put file name.
The process is displayed. Check the display.
(TEST DATA)
TEST DATA
(Process status)
RECEIVE
TESTING
After completion, the result is displayed.
Pressing [CA] key cancels the simulation resets the operation.
Note: Executable only when PCL and NIC are installed.
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE

1. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Main Sub
code code
A0
01
E1
00
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
80
81
82
84
88
E7
F1
F2
F5
F6
02
10
11
12
00
03
10
15
19
20
37
50
95
02
04
05
58
02
00
10
80
81
82
84
88
96
99
Trouble contents
Trouble
detection
Security incompatibility error

IMC PWB communication trouble
MCU
IMC PWB trouble
IMC PWB ASIC error
IMC PWB CODEC IC error
IMC PWB flash ROM error
IMC PWB expaned memory module
(DIMM) error
IMC PWB page memory error
/SRAM error
IMC PWB standard compression memory
error
IMC PWB smoothing IC error
(protocol)
(Parity)
(Overrun)
(Framing)
(Time-out)
LSU trouble
CCD black level error
CCD white level error
Shading trouble
Finisher communication trouble
FIN
Delivery roller lift motor trouble
Staple motor trouble
Tray lift motor trouble
Paper alignment motor F trouble
Paper alignment motor R trouble
RAM data trouble
Incompatible trouble
Paper exit option configuration error
Toner supply failure
Identification error
Model error
Type error
Destination error
Data abnormality
Misc error
CRUM chip communication error
Temperature humidity sensor abnormality
Copy lamp (xenon lamp) error
FAX control PWB communication trouble MCU
FAX control PWB trouble
FAX control PWB communication trouble
(Protocol)
(Parity)
(Overrun)
(Framing)
(Time-out)
Combination error between the MCU and
the FAX firmware.
FAX control PWB destination error
Trouble code
Trouble
Trouble contents
Main Sub
detection
code code
F9
00 Printer PWB communication trouble
MCU
10 Printer PWB trouble
(Protocol)
(Parity)
(Overrun)
(Framing)
(Time-out)
96 MCU and PCL PWB communication
versions discrepancy error
99 Printer PWB language error
H2
00 Main heater lamp thermistor open hard
detection
01 Sub heater lamp thermistor open hard
detection
H3
00 Main heater lamp abnormally high
temperature hard detection trouble
01 Sub heater lamp abnormally high
10 Main heater lamp abnormally high
temperature soft detection trouble
11 Sub heater lamp abnormally high
H4
00 Main heater lamp abnormally low
temperature detection
01 Sub heater lamp abnormally low
20 Main heater lamp abnormally low
21 Sub heater lamp abnormally low
H5
01 10 times of continuous detection of the
lower paper exit sensor (POD1) lead edge
jam or the upper paper exit sensor
(POD2) lead edge jam or the duplex
sensor (PPD2) rear edge jam
L1
00 Scanner feed trouble
L3
00 Scanner return trouble
L4
01 Main motor trouble
11 Shifter motor trouble
31 Fusing fan lock trouble
32 Power (back up) fan lock trouble
33 Paper exit fan lock trouble
L6
10 Polygon motor trouble
L8
10 Power abnormality detection trouble
U1
01 FAX battery error
02 PANEL LOW battery error
U2
04 EEPROM communication error
20 Machine speed code data error
U7
00 RIC communication trouble
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 1
Trouble code
Trouble contents
Main Sub
code code
U9
00 Operation control PWB communication
trouble
trouble (Protocol)
trouble (Parity)
trouble (Overrun)
trouble (Framing)
trouble (Time-out)
99 Operation panel destination error
EE
EL Developer adjustment trouble
(Over-toned abnormality)
EU Developer adjustment trouble
(Under-toned abnormality)
PF
00 PF trouble
Trouble
detection
OPE
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
E1
13
14
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Remarks
Content
Details
Cause
2. Details of trouble code

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
A0
01
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E1
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
10
11
12
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Security incompatibility error

When the PCL or the FAX control PWB is
installed, it does not match with
compatible/incompatible setup of the MCU
PWB security.
The security compatibility/incompatibility of
the installed PCL or FAX control PWB
does not match with that of the MCU PWB.
Cheek the security compatibility/
incompatibility of each board. Match the
security compatibility/incompatibility of the
boards.
Communication trouble between MCU and
IMC PWB
IMC PWB connector disconnection.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.
IMC PWB trouble
IMC PWB hardware abnormality
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
IMC PWB ASIC error

ASIC abnormality on IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
IMC PWB CODEC IC error

CODEC IC (JBIG chip) abnormality on
IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
Remarks
15
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Remarks
16
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Remarks
17
80
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
IMC PWB flash ROM error

Flash ROM abnormality on IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB.
When the program download is abnormally
terminated, a error may occur. In this case,
download the program again.
Program ROM abnormality
IMC PWB expanded memory module
(DIMM) error
IMC extended compression memory
module (DIMM) installation error.
IMC extended compression memory
module (DIMM) access error.
IMC expanded memory module installation
trouble.
IMC expanded memory module trouble.
IMC expanded memory contact trouble.
IMC PWB abnormality.
Check installation of the expanded
memory module. (Spec: Added to Slot 1.)
Replace the expanded memory module.
Replace the IMC PWB.
Extend memory abnormality for
compressed image store (DIMM module)
IMC PWB page memory error
/SRAM error
IMC PWB page memory or work SRAM
access error
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
Print buffer page memory or work SRAM

abnormality
IMC PWB standard compression memory
error
Access error of standard compression
memory on IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
Standard compression image store

memory abnormality
IMC PWB smoothing IC error
IMC PWB smoothing IC abnormality
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB

(protocol)
IMC PWB (Protocol error)
MCU PWB.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
E1
81
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
82
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
84
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
88
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7
02
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
IMC PWB communication trouble (Parity)

printer IMC (Parity error)
MCU PWB.
(Overrun)
IMC PWB (Overrun error)
MCU PWB.
(Framing)
IMC PWB (Framing error)
MCU PWB.
(Time-out)
IMC PWB (Time-out error)
MCU PWB.
LSU trouble
BD signal from LSU is not detected in a
constant cycle (Kept OFF or ON)
LSU connector or LSU inside harness
trouble or disconnection.
Polygon motor rotation abnormality.
Laser does not illuminate.
MCU PWB failure.
Check for disconnection of the LSU
connector.
Check the LSU operation with SIM 61-1.
Check that the polygon motor rotates
normally.
Check laser LED lighting.
Replace the LSU unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
E7
10
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
11
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
12
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
03
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CCD black level error

CCD black reference plate scan level
abnormality when the copy lamp turns off.
Flat cable installation failure to CCD unit.
CCD unit error.
Check flat cable installation to the CCD
unit.
Check CCD unit.
CCD white level error
Improper CCD white reference plate
reading level for copy lamp lighting
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and reference
white plate.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
CCD unit abnormality.
MCU PWB abnormality. (Occurred in the
RSPF scan position)
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white plate.
Check the copy lamp light quantity and its
operation. (SIM 5-3)
Check CCD unit.
Check MCU PWB.
Shading trouble
White correction is not completed in the
specified number of times.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and reference.
white plate.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
CCD unit abnormality.
MCU PWB abnormality.
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white plate.
Check the copy lamp light quantity and its
operation. (SIM 5-3)
Check CCD unit.
Check MCU PWB.
Finisher communication trouble
Communication line test error occurs when
power is turned on or after the exit of a
simulation mode.
Error in finisher communication
Connection trouble or disconnection of the
connector and harness between the body
and the finisher.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Control PWB failure.
Malfunction by noises.
Canceled by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connectors and the harness of
communication line.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Delivery roller lift motor trouble
Paper exit roller lift-up motor operation
abnormality
Motor lock.
Motor rpm abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
Use SIM3-3 to check the paddle motor
operation
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F1
10
15
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
19
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
20
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
37
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
50
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
95
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Staple motor trouble

Staple motor operation abnormality
Motor lock.
Use SIM 3-3 to check the staple motor
operation.
Tray lift motor trouble
The finisher lift-up motor does not reach
the specified position
Lift-up motor abnormality.
Lift-up motor upper limit sensor
abnormality.
Finisher PWB abnormality.
Use SIM 3-3 to check the lift-up motor
operation
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F2
02
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
04
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Paper alignment motor F trouble

Alignment motor operation abnormality
Motor lock.
Use SIM3-3 to check the alignment (F)
motor operation.
Paper alignment motor R trouble
Alignment motor operation abnormality
Motor lock.
Use SIM3-3 to check the alignment (R)
motor operation
RAM data trouble
Backup RAM contents are disturbed
Malfunction by noise.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Incompatible trouble
Speed does not coincide between finisher
and main unit
Connection of a finisher incompatible with
the machine is detected.
Connect the MX-FN13 to the machine.
Paper exit option configuration error

An improper option is installed.
Configuration of the paper exit option is
improperness.
Install a proper option.
Cause
05
58
Check
and
remedy
Content
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Toner supply failure

The value judged from the actual toner
supply hysteresis differs greatly from the
toner sensor value
Developing unit trouble.
Toner supply abnormality caused by
installation of unpacked toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit.
Use SIM 25-1 to perform DV stirring.
Identification error
Model error
Type error
Destination error
Data abnormality
Misc error
(Identification error)
When the CRUM trademark differs.
When the CRUM company code differs.
(Model error)
When the boot program model code does
not match with the CRUM model
information
(Type error)
When the CRUM type is other than
[Genuine/Conversion/Production rotation]
(Destination error)
The destination of the body differs from
that of the CRUM
(Data abnormality)
The initial check information includes an
erroneous value.
When the max. toner supply time is 00.
When the print hard stop is 00.
CRUM chip failure.
Erroneous TNCA.
Replace the CRUM chip.
Replace the TNCA.
CRUM chip communication error
CRUM chip failure.
Developing unit contact trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Check installation of the developing unit.
Temperature humidity sensor connector
disconnection.
Short-circuit of the temperature humidity
sensor was detected.
Check the connection of temperature
humidity sensor.
Replace the temperature humidity sensor.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F5
02
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F6
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
10
80
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
81
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Copy lamp (xenon lamp) error

The copy lamp does not light up
Copy lamp abnormality.
Copy lamp harness abnormality.
CCD PWB harness abnormality.
Check the copy lamp. (SIM 5-3)
When the lamp lights:
Check the harnesses and connectors
between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB.
When the lamp does not light:
Check the harness and connector between
the copy lamp and the MCU PWB.
Replace the copy lamp unit.
FAX control PWB
FAX control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness trouble between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB.
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
FAX control PWB trouble
FAX control PWB abnormality
FAX control PWB defect
Replate the FAX control PWB
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F6
82
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
84
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
88
Content
Details
Cause

(Protocol)
FAX control PWB (Protocol error)
FAX control PWB connector disconnection
PWB and MCU PWB.
(Parity)
FAX control PWB (Parity error)
FAX control PWB connector disconnection
PWB and MCU PWB.
Check
and
remedy
96
Content
Details
Cause
99
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

(Overrun)
FAX control PWB (Overrun error)
disconnection.
PWB and MCU PWB.
(Framing)
FAX control PWB (Framing error)
disconnection.
PWB and MCU PWB.
(Time-out)
FAX control PWB (Time-out error)
disconnection.
PWB and MCU PWB.
Combination error between the MCU and
the FAX firmware.
The version of the FAX firmware is not
changed 04.xx or later.
The version of the FAX firmware is not
proper.
Change the version of the FAX firmware to
04.xx or later.
FAX control PWB destination error
The machine destination setup does not
coincide with the FAX control PWB
destination setup.
The machine destination setup (Sim 26-6)
does not coincide with the FAX control
PWB setup
Check the variety of FAX LIU PWB.
Check the machine destination setup (Sim
22-6) and FAX country code (Soft SW
table).
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F9
00
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
10
80
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
81
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
82
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Printer PWB communication trouble

printer PWB
Printer PWB connector disconnection.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB
and the MCU PWB.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
Check ROM on printer PWB.
Printer PWB trouble
Printer PWB abnormality
Printer PWB defect
Replace the printer PWB
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F9
84
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
88
Content
Details
Cause

(Protocol)
printer PWB (Protocol error)
and the MCU PWB.
(Parity)
printer PWB (Parity error)
and the MCU PWB.
(Overrun)
printer PWB (Overrun error)
and the MCU PWB.
Check
and
remedy
96
Content
Details
99
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

(Framing)
printer PWB (Framing error)
and the MCU PWB.
(Time-out)
printer PWB (Time-out error)
and the MCU PWB.
MCU and PCL PWB communication
versions discrepancy error
Incompatible PCL PWB was installed to
the copier
Different PCL PWB was installed.
Install the MX-PB12 to the copier
Printer PWB language error

The machine language setup does not
coincide with the PCL board language
setup.
PCL board connection error.
SIM setup error.
Check combination between the firmware
on PCL board and the panel screen data,
and download the correct version, if
necessary.
Check the machine language information.
(Machine language setup: SIM 26-22)
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H2
00
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
01
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
H3
00
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
01
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Main heater lamp thermistor open hard

detection
Main heater lamp thermistor open
detection.
Fusing unit not installed.
Main thermistor defect.
Fusing section connector contact failure.
Check the harness and the connector of
the thermistor and the MCU.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H3
10
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Sub heater lamp thermistor open hard

detection
Fusing sub thermistor open detection.
Sub thermistor defect.
Check the harness and the connector of
the thermistor and the MCU.
Main heater lamp abnormally high
The fusing main heater thermistor causes
abnormally high temperature
Check the main heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-2-1.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input
circuit.
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.
Sub heater lamp abnormally high
The fusing sub thermistor causes
abnormally high temperature
Check the sub heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-2-2.
circuit.
SIM 14.
Details of trouble
11
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
H4
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Main heater lamp abnormally high

A/D value the fusing main thermistor
causes abnormally high temperature (over
230C).
Main heater lamp thermistor defect.
SIM 5-2-1.
circuit.
SIM 14.
Sub heater lamp abnormally high
A/D value the fusing sub heater lamp
thermistor causes abnormally high
temperature (over 230C).
Sub heater lamp thermistor defect.
SIM 5-2-2.
circuit.
SIM 14.
Main heater lamp abnormally low
The setup temperature (about 90C) is not
reached within the specified time (about
17sec) from turning on the power.
When the temperature of main heater
lamp thermistor falls below 140C in the
standby mode or printing.
When the temperature of main heater
lamp thermistor falls below 50C in the
pre-heat mode.
Main heater lamp thermistor defect
Main heater lamp failure
Main thermostat failure
Control PWB failure
Check the heater lamp blinking with SIM 52.
circuit.
Check for disconnection of the heater lamp
and thermostat.
Check the interlock switch.
SIM 14.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H4
01
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
20
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Sub heater lamp abnormally low

The setup temperature (about 90C) is not
reached within the specified time (about
17sec) from turning on the power.
When the temperature of sub heater
thermistor falls below 140C in the standby
mode or printing.
When the temperature of sub heater lamp
thermistor falls below 50C in the pre-heat
mode.
Sub heater lamp thermistor defect.
Sub heater lamp failure.
Sub thermostat failure.
SIM 5-2-2.
circuit.
SIM 14.
Main heater lamp abnormally low
The setup temperature (about 25C: Sim
43-1-1) is not reached within the specified
time (about 32sec) from turning on the
power.
A/D value of fusing main thermistor is not
reached within the specified temperature.
(specified temperature : SIM43-1 (600dpi)
25C )
Main heater lamp failure.
Main thermostat failure.
SIM 5-1.
circuit.
SIM 14.
Check that there is no foreign material in
the contact section between the thermistor
and the heat roller.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H4
21
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
H5
01
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Sub heater lamp abnormally low

The setup temperature (about 25C: Sim
43-1-1) is not reached within the specified
time (about 32sec) from turning on the
power.
A/D value of fusing sub thermistor is not
reached within the specified temperature
(specified temperature : SIM43-1 (600dpi)
25C )
Sub heater lamp failure.
Sub thermostat failure.
SIM 5-2-2.
circuit.
SIM 14.
Check that there is no foreign material in
the contact section between the thermistor
and the heat roller.
10 times of continuous detection of the
lower paper exit sensor (POD1) lead edge
jam or the upper paper exit sensor (POD2)
lead edge jam or the duplex sensor
(PPD2) rear edge jam
After supplying the power, one of the
above jams occurs 10 times continuously
in printing
Counting is started on supplying the
power. When any one of the above jams
occurs, one count is made. When paper
entry to the POD1 or POD2 is detected,
the counter is cleared.
A paper jam (paper rounding, etc.) near
the duplex sensor (PPD2) on the fusing
unit is not canceled completely.
POD1, POD2, PPD2 sensor breakdown or
harness connection trouble
Fusing unit installation failure
Check for jam paper in the fusing section.
(paper winding, etc.)
Check fusing unit installation.
Check the POD1, POD2 or PPD2 sensor.
Clear the trouble with SIM 14.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
L1
00
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
L3
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4
01
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Scanner feed trouble

Scanner feed is not completed within the
specified time.
Mirror unit defect.
Scanner wire disconnection.
Origin detection sensor error.
Mirror motor harness abnormality.
Check the scanning operation with SIM 11.
When the mirror not feeds:
Check for disconnection of the scanner
wire.
the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
When the mirror feeds:
Check the mirror home position sensor
with SiM 1-2.
Scanner return trouble
Scanner return is not completed within the
specified time.
When OC copying with the mirror at the
home position, the mirror is not in the
home position.
Mirror unit defect.
The scanner wire is disconnected.
Origin detection sensor error.
Mirror motor harness abnormality.
Check the scanning operation with SIM 11.
When the mirror fails to return:
Check for disconnection of the scanner
wire.
the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
When the mirror feeds:
Check the mirror home position sensor
with SiM 1-2.
Main motor trouble
The main motor does not rotate.
The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec
or more after the main motor rotates.
during rotation of the main motor.
Main motor defect.
Main motor connection, harness trouble or
disconnection.
MCU PWB failure.
Check the main motor operation with SIM
25-1.
Check connection of the main motor
harness and connector.
Replace the main motor.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
L4
11
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
31
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
32
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
33
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
L6
10
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Shifter motor trouble

The shifter home position detection signal
is not detected when the shifter is
operating.
Shifter motor trouble or harnes connection
trouble and disconnection.
Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Check the shifter motor operation with SIM
3-11.
Check connection of the shifter motor
harness/connector.
Replace the shifter motor.
Fusing fan lock trouble
Fusing fan does not rotate.
The fusing fan lock signal is detected for
1sec or more.
Fusing fan connection trouble, harness
disconnection.
MCU PWB failure.
Check connection of the fusing fan.
Replace the fusing fan.
Power fan lock trouble
Exhaust/intake fan motor does not rotate.
The fan lock signal is detected for 1sec or
more.
Fan connection trouble, harness
disconnection.
MCU PWB failure.
Check connection of the exhaust/intake
fan.
Replace the exhaust/intake fan.
Paper exit fan lock trouble
Paper exit fan does not rotate.
The paper exit fan lock signal is detected
for 1sec or more.
Paper exit fan connection trouble, harness
disconnection.
MCU PWB failure.
Check connection of the paper exit fan.
Replace the paper exit fan.
Polygon motor lock trouble
The polygon motor does not rotate.
or more after the polygon motor rotates.
during rotation of the polygon motor.
Polygon motor unit failure
Polygon motor connection, harness trouble
or disconnection
MCU PWB failure
Check the polygon motor operation with
SIM 61-1.
polygon motor
Replace the polygon motor.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
L8
10
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U1
01
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
02
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2
04
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
20
Content
Details
Cause
U7
00
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
U9
00
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Power abnormality detection trouble

The power status monitoring signal keeps
power OFF state after passing the
specified time (2sec).
Circuit around the power status monitoring
signal (PSSTS) failure.
Check whether power status monitoring
signal (PSSTS) on MCU PWB is OPEN or
not.
Replace MCU PWB.
FAX battery error
The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
control PWB falls.
The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
control PWB falls.
Check voltage of the SRAM back up
battery.
Replace the battery.
PANEL LOW battery error
The voltage of the panel clock function
battery falls.
The voltage of the panel clock function
battery falls.
Check voltage of panel clock function
battery.
Replace the battery.
EEPROM communication error
EEPROM communication error
EEPROM defect.
ICU PWB EEPROM access circuit failure.
Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Clear trouble with SIM 16.
Machine speed code data error
The machine boot speed information is not
identical to the model code speed
information
EEPROM defect.
SIM operation error.
Check for matching of the machine and
model information setting in SIM26-57.
RIC communication trouble
Error in communication with RIC.
Error in communication test after turning
on the power or canceling SIM.
Connector harness contact trouble or
disconnection.
RIC control PWB trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Malfunction by noises.
Check the communication cable,
connectors from the RIC box to the main
body.
Operation control PWB communication
trouble
the operation control PWB
Operation control PWB connector
disconnection
Harness failure of the operation control
PWB and the MCU PWB
the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check ROM on the operation control PWB.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
80
U9
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
81
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
82
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
84
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
88
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
99
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

trouble (Protocol)
the operation control PWB (Protocol error)
disconnection.
Harness failure of the operation control.
PWB and the MCU PWB.
trouble (Parity)
the operation control PWB (Parity error)
disconnection.
trouble (Overrun)
the operation control PWB (Overrun error)
disconnection.
trouble (Framing)
the operation control PWB (Framing error)
disconnection.
trouble (Time-out)
the operation PWB (Time-out error)
disconnection.
Operation panel destination error
An error occurred in checking the
destination of the operation panel and the
main body.
Erroneous connection the operation panel
unit.
SIM setup error.
Check the destination information of the
operation panel unit and the MCU. (Use
SIM 26-6 for the destination of the body.)
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
EE
EL
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
EU
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
PF
00
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Developer adjustment trouble (Over-toned

abnormality)
An abnormality occurred in execution of
automatic developer adjustment.
Sample data was detected over-toner.
Toner concentration sensor abnormality.
Toner concentration trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Use SIM 25-2 to perform the auto
developer adjustment.
Developer adjustment trouble (Undertoned abnormality)
An abnormality occurred in execution of
automatic developer adjustment.
Sample data was detected under-toner.
Toner concentration sensor abnormality.
Toner concentration trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Use SIM 25-2 to perform the auto
developer adjustment.
PF trouble
The copy inhibit command from RIC is
received.
Judged by the host.
Inform to the host.
[8] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance list
(For 26cpm)
: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
: Cleaning
Unit
Process
DV
Fusing
Paper feed
Transport
Others
: Replace
: Lubricate
Parts
Drum
Cleaner blade
Seal F/R
Drum frame unit
(Toner reception sheet)
MC unit
Separation pawl unit
Star ring
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner sensor
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Upper separation pawl
Upper cleaning pad
Lower separation pawl
Thermistor
Fuser gear
Lower fuser bearing
Paper guide
Pickup roller
Paper feeding sheet
Pickup roller and feed roller
(RSPF)
Transport roller unit
Gear
Paper feed rollers
Gears
Ozone filter
75k
150k
225k
300k
375k
450k
525k
600k
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N MAINTENANCE 8 - 1
Note
Usable for three PM cycles
Changing criteria for parts: 100k
(For 31cpm)
: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
: Cleaning
Unit
Process
DV
Fusing
Paper feed
Transport
Others
: Replace
: Lubricate
Parts
Drum
Cleaner blade
Seal F/R
Drum frame unit
(Toner reception sheet)
MC unit
Separation pawl unit
Star ring
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner sensor
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Upper separation pawl
Upper cleaning pad
Lower separation pawl
Thermistor
Fuser gear
Lower fuser bearing
Paper guide
Pickup roller
Paper feeding sheet
Pickup roller and feed roller
(RSPF)
Gear
Paper feed rollers
Gears
Ozone filter
100k
150k
200k
300k
400k
450k
500k
600k
Note
Usable for three PM cycles
Changing criteria for parts: 100k
2. Details of Maintenance
Unit
A. Process unit
B. Developing unit
C. Fusing section
D. Optical section
E. Paper feed
section
Parts
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
F. Side door unit
G. 1st paper exit unit

H. Laser unit
I. Power unit
J. PWB
Unit
L. Drive section
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Drum
Drum section
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Main charger
Cleaning blade
Drum frame unit
Moquette F/R
Separation pawl
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
DV blade
Toner sensor
Thermostat
Thermistor
Paper guide
Lower heat roller
Heater lamp
Upper cleaning pad
Upper heat roller
CCD unit
Lamp unit
a. Lamp
b. PWB
c. Wire
d. Mirror motor
Paper feed solenoid
Tray sensor PWB
Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor
Multi manual
a. Paper feed roller/
paper feed
pickup roller
b. Reverse sensor
c. Separation sheet
d. Clutch/solenoid
Upper 500
sheets tray
pickup roller
paper feed
b. Separation sheet
Lower 500
sheets tray
pickup roller
paper feed
b. Separation sheet
c. Lift up unit
d. Transport clutch
e. Paper feed clutch
f. Transport clutch
g. Solenoid
h. Sensor PWB
Transport roller
DUP transport roller
DUP motor
Cooling fan
Exit roller
LSU
Power source
Option CN PWB
IMC PWB
MCU PWB
Motherboard PWB
Second interface PWB
M. Transport section
N. Operation section
O. Switch
P. RSPF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Parts
DUP reverse motor
Main drive motor
Toner motor
PS transport clutch
Paper feed clutch
Drive unit
Lift up motor
Transport roller
Operation section
OPU PWB
Key PWB
LCD unit
Power switch
Document tray a. Document tray unit
section
b. Document length
sensor
c. Document width
resistor PWB
Paper feed unit a. Paper feed clutch
section
b. Pickup roller
c. Paper feed roller
d. Paper feed unit
e. Separation sheet
f. Sensor
Transport
a. Transport unit
section
b. PS clutch
c. Pressure release
solenoid
d. RSPF motor
e. Transport roller
f. Roller
g. Sensor
h. Roller
i. Roller
Base section
a. Interface PWB
b. Solenoid
c. Book sensor
d. Sensor
A. Process unit
(Note for servicing the OPC drums)
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
Note:
Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care not to
touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both edges of the
OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to the cleaning
blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade may flip.)
5mm
5mm
K. Ozone filter
[Countermeasures]
(2) Drum section
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,

perform the following countermeasures.
a. Main charger
1
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.

4
2) Apply KYNAR to prevent blade flip.

[Check method]
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily dirt
and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the following
method.
Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
Note:
Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
3
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density area
in the previously exposed section.
b. Cleaning blade
1
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping the

OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not recovered,
replace the OPC drum.
(1) Drum
2
2
4
3
c. Drum frame unit
Note: When installing the process unit in the main unit after replacing
the drum, process unit may not be able to install by reason of the
drum drive coupling position.
In this case, rotate the drum about 45 degrees and install again.
B. Developing section
d. Moquette F/R
(1) Developer
Note: If it disturbs the blade movement, replace it and attach new one.
e. Separation pawl
Disassembly* Hold the tip of the separation pawl and remove it.
Assembly* Press the center of the separation pawl and install it.
(2) Toner filter unit
(4) DV blade
[DV blade attachment reference]
[Cross-section]
Bump
0
reference
0.5
0.5
Rib reference
(5) Toner sensor

(3) DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
Clean the sensor only after removing used DV when replacing DV.
[DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment reference]
0
Molt
edge
reference
0.3
C. Fusing section
Molt
edge
reference
0.3
1
0.5
Projection edge
reference
0.5
Projection edge
reference
3
(3) Paper guide
2
1
1
(1) Thermostat
Note: When securing the lamp harness and the thermostat, the
tightening torque of the screw (4 positions) is 6-9 kgs.
(4) Fusing separation pawl (lower)
(2) Thermistor
(5) Lower heat roller

3
(8) Fusing separation pawl (upper)
3
2
1
2
(9) Upper heat roller

1
(6) Heater lamp
1
2
(7) Upper cleaning pad
1
2
1
2
3
(10) Thermistor cleaning pad
1
2
2
D. Optical section
(1) CCD unit
2
1
2
1
3
5
4
4
2
3
a. Lamp
(2) Lamp unit
1
3
1
1
2
6
1
b. PWB
5
2
3
4
4
(1) Paper feed solenoid
c. Wire
1
2
(2) Tray sensor PWB
1
2
(3) Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor

d. Mirror motor
3
A
(4) Multi manual paper feed
a. Paper feed roller/pickup roller
E. Paper feed section
A
B
A
B
C
Paper feed roller

Pickup roller
Separation sheet
c. Separation sheet
1)
2)
5
6
3)
Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the
axis. One rice grain for each.

Installation*Install so that the cam transmit arm (1) comes under the
roller arm (2).
d. Clutch/solenoid
(Clutch)
1
6
5
4
2
3
2
3
5
LOCK
2
1
4
b. Reverse sensor
1
1
2
(Solenoid)
1
2
(5) Upper 500 sheets tray paper feed
(Clutch)
A
A
A
A
1
4
1
3
Note: With the toner cartridge installed, do not tilt or shake the developer cartridge.
4
2
1
3
3
2
b. Separation sheet
1
3
3
4
When replacing, be careful not
to adhere conduction grease

(black) to the drive section.
Slightly apply grease GE676

(UKOG-0013QSZZ) to the
drum boss.
1)
3
2
4
2
b. Separation sheet

Grease should not come out when assembling.
(6) Lower 500 sheets tray paper feed


Grease should not come out when assembling.
c. Lift up unit
1
2
1
1
3
d. Transport clutch
2
g. Solenoid
1
2
3
1
3
e. Paper feed clutch

h. Sensor PWB
1
3
2
3
f. Transport clutch
F. Side door unit

(1) Transport roller unit
3
1
Check that two springs are securely inserted into the transfer roller
unit bosses.
(2) Transport roller
(4) DUP motor

1
2
3
3
1
2
3
1
(3) DUP transport roller
G. 1st paper exit unit

(1) Cooling fan
3
3
3
4
1
1
5
3
4
5
3
1
2
2
(2) Exit roller
(Except North America)
2
1
1
3
4
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
H. Laser unit
Note: Do not disassemble the LSU unit.
(1) LSU
1) Turn OFF the machine power, and disconnect the power plug from
the power outlet.
2) Remove the left cabinet and exit tray.
3) Disconnect the LSU connector, and remove the securing screws to
remove the LSU.
Note: Check to confirm that the solenoid shaft is in the gate bracket,
and fix with the screw.
1
2
2
2
3
I. Power unit
(1) Power source
J. PWB
(1) Option CN PWB
1
1
3
1
1
1
3
4
3
2
3
2
(2) IMC PWB
(4) Motherboard PWB

2
1
2
(3) MCU PWB
4
3
3
3
2
3
1
1
(5) Second interface PWB
2
1
2
1
2
K. Ozone filter
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
Note: Before removing the left cover, remove the No.1 tray in advance.
(3) Toner motor
1
2
(4) PS transport clutch

1
L. Drive section
(1) DUP reverse motor
3
4
1
2
2
(2) Main drive motor
2
3
(5) Paper feed clutch
(7) Lift up motor
1
2
1
3
1
2
(6) Drive unit
3
1
1
4
3
3
2
Drive unit (Grease application part)
M. Transport section
(1) Transport roller
2
1
2
1
(2) OPU PWB
2
3
(3) Key PWB
N. Operation section
(1) Operation section
(4) LCD unit
P. RSPF
(1) Document tray section
a. Document tray unit
1
2
2
2
O. Switch
2
(1) Power switch
(2) Paper feed unit section
b. Document length sensor
a. Paper feed clutch
2
1
1
1
3
3
2
2
b. Pickup roller
c. Document width resistor PWB
1
2
c. Paper feed roller
d. Paper feed unit
2
3
e. Separation sheet
b. PS clutch
f. Sensor
3
2
1
2
1
1
c. Pressure release solenoid
(3) Transport section

a. Transport unit
d. RSPF motor
2
1
1
3
1
1
2
1
f. Roller
2
1
2
1
<Note for disassembling the motor>
The motor is positioned by the jig. Use the mark when assembling
it to the original position.
e. Transport roller
1
2
g. Sensor
3
2
3
2
1
1
3
2
(4) Base section
h. Roller
a. Interface PWB
1
2
1
2
b. Solenoid
1
2
3
I
O R GI
i. Roller
1
1
2
1
2
c. Book sensor
3
1
2
1
d. Sensor
3. Other related items

A. Counter clear
Item
Maintenance cycle setting
Jam/trouble counter clear
Paper feed counter clear
Scan/Stapler/Punch/Saddle
stitch counter clear
Maintenance counter clear
Developing counter clear
Copy counter clear
Drum counter clear
Printer, IMC, Duplex, other
counter clear
FAX counter clear
Scanner mode counter clear
SIM
SIM 21-1
SIM 24-1
SIM 24-2
SIM 24-3
Remarks
SIM 24-4 *
SIM 24-5 At developer replacement
SIM 24-6
SIM 24-7 At drum replacement
SIM 24-9
SIM 24-10
SIM 24-15
31 sheet model: When maintenance message is displayed, replace
consumption part reaching the number of sheets of maintenance,

then clear the replaced part's counter only.
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE
A. Firmware update method

(for Copier, and fax firm)
1. Firmware update procedure
Following operational procedures are for:

Copier firm
(Necessary items for update)
fax firm
A Personal computer
B RS232C cross cable (D-sub 9pin to D-sub 9pin, or D-sub 25pin to
D-sub 9pin)
1)
Make sure copier is off, and connect it to PC with download cable

beforehand.
2)
Start up the maintenance program on PC. Select the model name

from the model selection dialogue box.
3)
Make sure only "Printer Control Board" tree is visible under "Simulation Command List".
4)
Turn on the copier. The machine starts up in the download mode.
5)
Additional tree will be visible when downloading maintenance program on PC.
C Software for version-up
(ROM type)
The flash ROM is directly installed to each PWB.
(Target PWB)
1 MCU PWB
2 Panel PWB
3 IMC PWB
4 Finisher PWB
Outline of Update Procedure

PC
C
Download
data
RS232C connector
(9pin or 25pin)
RS232C cross cable

(D-sub 9pin to D-sub 9pin)
or
(D-sub 25pin to D-sub 9pin)
I/F circuit (9pin)
1
Operation
panel
MCU-PWB
IMC
PWB
Finisher
Make sure to start up maintenance program before turn on the

machine.
Prepare following files necessary for program update

Maintenance software: maintenance.exe
Andromeda module file: ProcModelP.mdl
USB communication program: JGRtoPRN.exe
Maintenance tool driver: SFZEJENU.inf
Ready to start download process
when these trees appear.
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N FIRMWARE UPDATE 9 - 1
6)
When downloading copier firm, expand "Special(Copier)", and

double-click on "All Data areas Download".
B. Printer Control Board firmware download method

Please follow the procedure below:
Note: It is okay to use serial cable instead.
1)
Turn on the copier.
2)
Start up in copier test command mode, and execute Sim67-14

"FLASHDOWNLOAD".
3)
Machine side, PC side: Connect the PC with the machine (printer

board) with a USB cable.
4)
And then, press OK key when notice message "PRESS OK KEY"

appears on the panel. Another message "Please Send Data" will
appear after a while.
5)
PC side: The detection wizard of a new hardware is booted.

Install the driver in the procedures below.
a. Select [Install from the list or a certain position] on the detection
wizard of a new hardware, and press [Next] button.
7)
b. Select [The following position is included], set the retrieval position to the same folder as the maintenance tool driver
(sfzejenu.inf), and press [Complete] button.
Select download file(*.dat), and press "Open" button.
c. Follow the directions on the screen, press [Continue] button,

and press [Complete] button.
d. If the menu urges rebooting the OS, reboot the OS.
e. After completion of installation, open [Printer and FAX] dialog,
and set [Maintenance Program Driver] as the default printer.
8)
Download procedure starts automatically.
9)
Notice message "Download is complete. Check the copier panel

to make sure the download is complete." will appear on PC.
6)
Start up the maintenance program on PC. Select the model name

from the model selection dialogue box.
7)
Expand "Printer Control Board", and double-click on "Printer Control Board Firmware Download".
Double click it.
8)
Dialog box will appear to select download file.
9)
Select Download file(*.sfu) and press "Open" button.
10) Close the maintenance program, and turn off the copier. Turn on
the copier again after pulling the plug.
This is the end of download procedure.
It is possible that download process somehow went wrong if the
copier does not start up properly. In that case, start up the copier
and maintenance program in download mode by repeating the step
1)-5) again. And then, Expand "Special", and double-click on "Confirm Error Status". If any of the message besides "No error has been
occurred" appears, it means that download is incomplete, so please
try again.
10) Download procedure will starts automatically.

11) Notice message "Data Send Complete" will appear on PC.
12) Notice message "Download is complete. Check the copier panel
to make sure the download is complete." will appear on PC.
13) Close maintenance program, and reset the machine by pressing
CA key.
This is the end of the download procedure.
C. Others (Troubleshooting)
Followings are the error possibly occur during the download process and troubleshooting method.
No
1
Warning/error message
Incorrect destination. Continue with the
download process?
Incorrect download file.
No downloadable data included.
This option not available.
The data size exceeds the Flash ROM size.

Try again with the appropriate size of data.
Time out error.
Communication (incoming) error.
Checksum error.
Error during the download process. Error

code: 0xXXXXXXXX
10
An error. [0xXXXXXXXX]
Detail
Destination of download file and copier doesn't match.
Possible to select either continue or cancel the job.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
To change destination, select "Yes". If not, select "No" and cancel download process.
Invalid download file for the machine is selected, or the file format is not correct.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm the download file. Possibly the improper download file is selected.
Unable to find appropriate data in selected download file.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Download procedure is executed on uninstalled optional kit.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm installed optional kit.
Panel flash ROM size is not enough to execute download procedure.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Exchange the flash ROM to the one which has more capacity.
Transmission error
Unable to receive data from the machine among the certain period of time.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication port or communication cable.
Incorrect download procedure.
The machine did not proceed download procedure correctly.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication port or communication cable.
Make sure the communication device of PC(either COM or parallel) is under right condition.
Transmission error
The check sum value of the transmission data is mismatch.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication device of PC (either COM or
parallel) is under right condition.
Download data file operation error.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming the selected download file is not abnormal and
not using other application.
The error occurred except the above errors.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication device of PC(either COM or
parallel) is under right condition.
RSPF-Paper feed
clutch
RSPF-DupSOL
MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 1
Fuser-Lamp(x2)
Thermister (x 2 Analog)
CN14
Key/LED PWB
OPU-PWB
LSU-UN
APC-PWB
LSU-PWB
Polygon-Motor
CN501
Fuser Unit
CN19
LCD
Touch Panel
Coin
Vender
CN27
WakeUp SW
CN28
Auditer I/F
BD-PWB
BD-Sensor
HVU
CN31
CSS1H: Tray Detector

PSRSOL: Paper Stop Roller Sol.
PCL1H: PickUp Cluth
LUM1H: Lift Up Motor
CN3
Toner-Motor
Main / Sub
Power Supply
Power Unit
CN10
OPERATION PANEL
CN502
DEV/CRUM
CN7
TRAY PAPER
SENSOR
CN12
OP-LO tray
PPD2: Paper Pass Detector
PAP2: Paper Empty
LUD2: Lift Up Detector
CSS2: Casette Detector
DRS2: Door Detector
PCL2: Pick Up Clutch
LUM2: Lift Up Motor
CN18
InterLock
Switch
CN29
OP-UP tray
PPD1: Paper Pass Detector
PAP1: Paper Empty
LUD1: Lift Up Detector
CSS1: Casette Detector
DRS1: Door Detector
PCL1: Pick Up Clutch
LUM1: Lift Up Motor
TRCL: Verical transport roller
clutch 2
CN8
MAIN-Motor
CN30
HPEMPTY: HandpaperEmpty sensor

HPIN: Handpaper IN Sensor
HPTRAY1: Handpaper TRAY Sensor 1
HPTRAY2: Handpaper TRAY Sensor 2
HPSIZE1: Handpaper Size Sensor 1
HPSIZE2: Handpaper Size Sensor 2
HPWS: Handpaper Width Sensor (Analog)
HPSOL: Handpaper PickUp Solenoid
Manual Feed Unit

Main body paper feed load
CN38
CS interface PWB
D-Sub 15pin
Reactor
(CE Only)
PS-SW
PS Cooling Fan
Front Cooling FAN
Defog Heater
(Japan Only)
AC
SPLC PWB
OR
PCL PWB
FAX PWB
Paper Alignment Plate Home Position Detector F

Paper Alignment Plate Home Position Detector R
Delivery Roller Position Detector
Delivery Tray Lower Limit Detector
Delivery Tray Upper Limit Detector
Paper Level Detector
Paper Pass Detector
Paper Rear Edge Detector C
Paper Rear Edge Detector F
Paper Rear Edge Detector R
Staple Empty Detector
Staple Lead Detector
Staple Home Position Sensor
Staple Tray Paper Detector
Inner Finisher Unit (Optional)
CN
Paper Feed Motor
CN22
Multi-step tray Unit (Optional)
CN15
CN23
(AB / INCH )
Paper Feed Motor
CN11
IMC PWB
Option
Connector PWB
CN5
PCL2H: Pick Up Clutch

LUM2H: Lift Up Motor
TRCLH: Vertical Transport Roller Clutch
CS interface PWB
Paper Remove
Sol
Duplex Paper Out Sensor
CCD-PWB
256/512MB DIMM (x 2)
Paper Size Sensor

AB
INCH
D-Sub 25pin
Down-Load-Connector
D-Sub 9pin
Plasmacluster
(Download PC with exclusive connection)
CN
2nd tray Unit (Optional)

CSS2H: Casette Detector
DRS2H: Door Detector
PPD2H: Paper Pass Detector
PAP2H: Paper Empty
LUD2H: Lift Up Detector
PCS1H ; Pick Up Solenoid
PAP1H ; Paper Empty

LUD1H ; Lift Up Detector
PPD1H (PIN) : Paper IN
Main tray Unit
MCU-PWB
Paper Full
Sensor
CN503
CN26
Humidity Sensor
CN25
Duplex Conveyance Sensor
Defog
Heater
Mirror HP
Sensor
CN6
CN1
CN504
CN4
CPLD Writer
CN505
CN21
Copy-Lamp
Scanner
Cover
Sensor
Mirror-Motor
INNER
FINISHER PWB
Duplex-Motor
Pout Cooling Fan (x 2)
Duplex 2 Motor
CN2
CN32
Shifter-Motor
Pout 2 Ssensor
Except North America
CN17
Pout Gate
Solenoid
Pout Sensor
Shifter
HP
Except North America
Sensor
2nd POUT
COVER SENSOR
Fuser Cooling Fan (x 2)
POUT2_R: Paper OUT (Right Tray) Detector

PFULL2_R: Paper Full (Right Tray) Detector
KEEPSOL1/2: KeepSolenoid (Right Tray)
Right Tray Paper OUT Unit (Optional)
RSPF-Pressure
release SOL
RSPF-CNT-PWB
RSPF-Motor
L2
L1
RSPF-SEN-PWB
RSPF Cover Sens
RSPF PS Sens
RSPF Paper Empty
RSPF Paper Out Sensor
RSPF Paper Width Sens (Analog)
RSPF BOOK Sens
RSPF Unit
Delivery Roller Lift Motor
Paper Alignment Motor F
Paper Alignment Motor R
Paper Delivery Motor
Paper Transport Motor
Stalpe Motor
Tray Lift Motor
Rear Edge Take-up Roller Solenoid
Paper Pass Gate Solenoid
Paddle Solenoid
Control PWB Cooling Fan
Stapler Cooling Fan
Paper Entry Gate
Safety Switch
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram
A. SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Mother PWB
CN9
USB SWITCH
BD6513F-E2
ISP1568
USB2.0 HOST
Controller
PCI Connector
PCI Connector
(JAPAN ONLY)
USB
Connector

USBCLK
RESETCLK
IM-Bus
OSC
12MHz
LCX373
USB1.1
ML60852A
LCH
PIO
RTC
I/F
Image
Cont
IO I/F
1284
Cont
System
Bus I/F
IO ASIC (Unicorn2)
ACE
LCX245
USB
Connector
LCX245
IRC
BUSSPRT
MEMA[14:5]
MEMD[31:0]
60Pin Connector
(MBUS Connector)
Bridge
EBUSC PIO
DATA[63:0]
ADDR[19:0]
System BUS
100MHz/64bit
LCX244
4Pin Connector
(RS-232C Connector)
UART
PCIC
EBIF
SDRAMC
Tx49Core
CPUCLK = 300MHz
3.3V
SDRAM0(L)
32MB
LD[31:0]
LA[20:0]
MEMD[15:0]
LCX244
Ether
MacPHYter II
PCI BUS
33MHz/32bit
OSC
25MHz
TMPR4937TB
G-Bus
ETHER
Connector
12MHz
USB HOST PWB

(JAPAN ONLY)
SDRAM0(H)
32MB
On Board 32bit
Serial EEPROM
256Kbit
MEMD[63:0]
256MB (Max)
SDRAM DIMM
144pin S.O.DIMM 64bit
SPD
B. PCL PWB BLOCK DIAGRAM

Flash SO-DIMM (Mask ROM)
slot3 32MB
Flash SO-DIMM
(Option)
slot2 8MB
Flash SO-DIMM
(Code)
slot1 16MB
MEMD[31:16]
Flash SO-DIMM
(Boot,ESC/P)
slot0 4MB or 8MB
UART Ch0
UART Ch1
2. Actual wiring chart
CN5(52746-1571)
V0
1
LP
2
D-GND
3
4
CP
5
D-GND
6
M
3.3V_EXT 7
8
D0
D1
9
D-GND 10
11
D2
12
D3
D-GND 13
DISP
14
VEE
15
CN**(*****)
1
V0
2
LP
3
D-GND
4
CP
5
D-GND
6
M
7 3.3V_EXT
8
D0
9
D1
10
D-GND
11
D2
12
D3
13
D-GND
14
DISP
15
VEE
CN6
(SM02(8.0)
B-BHS-1-TB)
CCFT+ 1
/CCFT
2
AB ONLY
PAPER SIZE SENSOR
(AB ONLY)
Sub scanning side
CN23(B34B-PHDSS-B)
/ABJP
1
DGND
2
LED1#
3
LED2#
5
LED3#
7
5V
9
DGND
11
DSCLK#
13
DSIN0
15
/INCHJP
17
DGND
18
LED1#
4
LED2#
6
LED3#
8
5V
10
DGND
12
DSCLK#
14
DSIN3
16
DSIN2A
19
DSIN2B
20
DGND
21
DGND
22
DSCLK#
23
DSCLK#
24
5V
25
5V
26
LED0#
27
LED0#
28
OCCOVER 29
DGND
30
5V(PULL UP) 31
5V(PULL UP) 32
MHP
33
DGND
34
CN23(B34B-PHDSS-B)
/ABJP
1
DGND
2
LED1#
3
LED1#
4
LED2#
5
LED2#
6
LED3#
7
LED3#
8
5V
9
5V
10
DGND
11
DGND
12
DSCLK#
13
DSCLK#
14
DSIN0
15
16
DSIN3
/INCHJP
17
DGND
18
19
DSIN2A
21
DGND
23
DSCLK#
25
5V
27
LED0#
20
DSIN2B
22
DGND
24
DSCLK#
26
5V
LED0#
28
OCCOVER 29
DGND
30
5V(PULL UP) 31
5V(PULL UP) 32
33
MHP
DGND
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
LED1#
LED2#
LED3#
5V
DGND
DSCLK
DSIN0
N.C
292250-8
Main scanning side

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LED1#
LED2#
LED3#
5V
DGND
DSCLK
DSIN0
N.C
292250-8
OC COVER SENSOR
1
2
3
OC COVER
DGND
PULL UP
292250-3
MHP SENSOR
PULL UP
3
MHP
2
DGND
1
S3B-PH-K-S
INCH ONLY
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
PAPER SIZE SENSOR

(INCH ONLY)
Sub scanning side
1
2
3
4
5
DSIN2A
DGND
DSCLK#
5V
LED0#
292250-8
Main scanning side

1
2
3
4
5
DSIN2B
DGND
DSCLK#
5V
LED0#
292250-8
OC COVER SENSOR
1 OC COVER
DGND
2
3
PULL UP
292250-3
MHP SENSOR
3
PULL UP
2
MHP
1
DGND
S3B-PH-K-S
PANEL UNIT
CN2(52271-2479)
GND
24
23 INFO_LED
22 /START_KEY
SENSE0
21
SENSE1
20
SENSE2
19
SENSE3
18
SENSE4
17
SCAN0
16
SCAN1
15
SCAN2
14
SCAN3
13
SCAN4
12
/SEG0
11
/SEG1
10
/SEG2
9
/SEG3
8
COM0
7
COM1
6
COM2
5
4 /BZR_PWM
3 START_LED
5Vsub
2
GND
1
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FPC
OPTICAL BASE PLATE (1/2)
MCU PWB
KEY PWB
CN1(IMSA-9619S-24C-TB)
GND
INFO_LED
/START_KEY
SENSE0
SENSE1
SENSE2
SENSE3
SENSE4
SCAN0
SCAN1
SCAN2
SCAN3
SCAN4
/SEG0
/SEG1
/SEG2
/SEG3
COM0
COM1
COM2
/BZR_PWM
START_LED
5Vsub
GND
CN4(52271-0469)
1
X2/
2
Y2/
3
X1
4
Y1
LCD UNIT
CN1(52610-1871)
DGND
18
17 +24V_OP
16
DGND
15
+5V
14
DGND
13
+3.3V
12
+3.3V
11 RES_OPU
10 /CLK_OPU
9 CRDY_OPU
8 SRDY_OPU
7 /TXD_OPU
6 /RXD_OPU
5
DGND
4 Standby_LED
3 /WakeUp_Key
2
+5Vsub
1
DGND
OPU PWB
CN9(52207-1885)
DGND
18
24V1
17
DGND
16
+5V
15
DGND
14
+3.3V
13
+3.3V
12
RES_OPU
11
/CLK_OPU
10
CRDY_OPU 9
SRDY_OPU
8
/TXD_OPU
7
/RXD_OPU
6
DGND
5
Standby_LED 4
/WakeUp_Key 3
+5Vsub
2
DGND
1
TOUCH PANEL
A. MCU - Panel unit, Optical base plate sensor section (P1)
<MIRROR MOTOR>
CCD PWB
RSPF (To P12)
FINISHER
CN903(SUB-D9)
1
N.C
2
SVCMDX
3
SVSTSX
4
DTRX
5
DGND
6
DSRX
7
RTSX
8
CTSX
9
N.C
CN905(SUB-D15)
1
PGND
2
24V_FN
3
/FINCRDY
4
FINSTS
5
/RESET#
6
FINPIN
7
24V_FN
8
PGND
9
DGND
10
3.3V1
11
/FINSRDY
12
FINCMD
13
5V1
14
/FINDET
15
DGND
CN904(SUB-D25)
1
DGND
2
24V_RSPF
3
/SPFMODB#
4
/SPFMODA#
5
SPFMODA#
6
SELC#
7
SELB#
8
SPFPDA
9
SPFRSOL#
10
SPFPSOL#
11
SPFPAPER
12
24V_RSPF
13
DGND
14
PGND
15
YSPF
16
DGND
17
SPFMODB#
18
SPFWS
19
3.3V1
20
SELA#
21
SPFCLH#
22
SPFGSOL#
23
SPFPDB
24
5V1
25
PGND
CN906(52147-0510)
1
MIRMODA#
2
MIRMODB#
3
/MIRMODA#
4
/MIRMODB#
5
24V_MIR
COPY LAMP UNIT
CN30(B18B-PHDSS-B)
2
DGND
1
5V
4
3.3V
3
SVSTS
6
DTR
5
CTS
8
SVCMD
7
RTS
10
DSR
9
/FINCRDY#
12
/FINSRDY
11
FINSTS#
14
FINCMD
13
/RESET#
16
/MSFINDET
15
/FINDET
18
PGND
17
24V1
CN901(B18B-PHDRS-B)
1
DGND
2
5V
3
3.3V
4
SVSTS
5
DTR
6
CTS
7
SVCMD
8
RTS
9
DSR
10
/FINCRDY
11
/FINSRDY
12
FINSTS
13
FINCMD
14
/RESET#
15
FINPIN
16
/FINDET
17
PGND
18
24VOP
CN26(IMSA-9604S-04C)
1
PGND
2
PGND
3
/CL
4
24V
CN31(B26B-PHDSS-B)
2
MIRMO0#
1
MIRMO2#
4
/MIRMODB#
3
MIRMO1#
6
MIRMODA#
5
MIRMODB#
8
DGND
7
/MIRMODA#
10
SPFWS
9
DGND
12
YSPF
11
/SPFMODB#
14
/SPFMODA#
13
SPFMODB#
16
SPFMODA#
15
SELC#
18
SELB#
17
SELA#
20
SPFCLH#
19
SPFRSOL#
22
SPFGSOL#
21
SPFPSOL#
24
SPFPAPER
23
5V
26
PGND
25
24V1
4
3
2
1
PGND
PGND
/CL
24V
CN6(FF4-32-S15D3-FA)
1
CCDD4
2
CCDD3
3
CCDD5
4
CCDD2
5
CCDD6
6
CCDD1
7
CCDD7
8
CCDD0
9
ADSCLK
10
ADWRT
11
ADSD
12
/f1
13
3.3V
14
/SH
15
DGND
16
/f2
17
DGND
18
DGND
19
DGND
20
/REFCK
21
DGND
22
/DATCK
23
DGND
24
/FR
25
/DUMC
26
/PB
27
/OB
28
5V
29
DGND
30
12V
31
DGND
32
12V
CN902(B26B-PHDSS-B)
1
MIRMO0#
2
MIRMO2#
3
/MIRMODB#
4
MIRMO1#
5
MIRMODA#
6
MIRMODB#
7
DGND
8
/MIRMODA#
9
SPFWS
10
DGND
11
YSPF
12
/SPFMODB#
13
/SPFMODA#
14
SPFMODB#
15
SPFMODA#
16
SELC#
17
SELB#
18
SELA#
19
SPFCLH#
20
SPFRSOL#
21
SPFGSOL#
22
SPFPSOL#
23
SPFPAPER
24
5V
25
PGND
26
24VOP
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CCDD4
CCDD3
CCDD5
CCDD2
CCDD6
CCDD1
CCDD7
CCDD0
ADSCLK
ADWRT
ADSD
/f1
3.3V
/SH
DGND
/f2
DGND
DGND
DGND
/REFCK
DGND
/DATCK
DGND
/FR
/DUMC
/PB
/OB
5V
DGND
12V
DGND
12V
CN1(FF4-32-S15D3-FA)
OPTICAL BASE PLATE(2/2)
CZHR-03V-S CZHR-03V-S
1
3
PullUp
2
2
POUT1
3
1
DGND
3
4
1
5
6
2
10
14
13
12
16
15
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
Red
1
2
3
4
5
CN2(B6B-PH-K-S)
SW24V
SW24V
SFTDA#
SFTDB#
/SFTDA#
/SFTDB#
CN4(B5B-PH-K-R)
SW24V
DUP2MODA#
DUP2MODB#
/DUP2MODA#
/DUP2MODB#
CN1(B5B-PAEK-1) Blue
1
SW24V / SW24V_Dup
2
DPXA
3
DPXB
4
/DPXA
5
/DPXB
CN22(S3B-PH-K-M) Green
1
24V
2
/PGSOL1
3
/PGSOL2
5V
SFTHP
DGND
5V(PullUp)
POUT1
DGND
TFANOUT
TFANRDY
PGND
TFANOUT
TFANRDY
PGND
DGND
CN32(B16B-PHDSS-B)
7
N.C
9
N.C
11
N.C
(N.C)
6
9
/POUT2B_DET
5V
SFTHP
DGND
GP1A71L3
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N
1
TFANOUT
1
3
TFANRDY
3
2
PGND
2
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N
TFANOUT
1
1
3
TFANRDY
3
2
PGND
2
3
2
1
S 3B-PH-K-S
* When right paper exit unit (option) is installed:

Right paper exit door open/close sensor
<PAPER EXIT COVER OPEN/CLOSE

SENSOR SW>
<2nd PAPER FULL SENSOR>
<2nd PAPER EXIT SENSOR>
<COOLING FAN 2>
<INTERNAL COOLING FAN>
<COOLING FAN 1>
<PAPER OUT1 SENSOR>
<DUPLEX 2 MOTOR>
Except North America: Installed

North America: Not installed
<SHIFTER MOTOR>
<DUPLEX MOTOR>
<PAPER OUT GATE SL>
PINK
BROWN
GRAY
<SHIFTER HP SENSOR>

[1st PAPER EXIT UNIT]
10
8
POUTCOV
DGND
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
292250-2
POUTCOV
1
2
DGND
4
5
7
5V
PFULL2
DGND
DGMD
DF3A-3P-2DS
2
5V
3
PFULL2
1
DGND
GP1SQ44S
292250-3
GP1SQ73P
3
5V(PULL_UP)
1
POUT2
2
DGND
3
2
1
CN21(B10B-PASK-1)
5V(PULL_UP)
POUT2
DGND

[2nd PAPER EXIT UNIT]
B. MCU - Optical base plate 2, OP I/F PWB, 1st paper exit unit, 2nd paper exit unit (P2)
MCU PWB
OP I/F PWB
RIC / DOWNLOAD/ PCI
MCU PWB

26
28
30
16
18
20
22
24
/HPIN
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
HPEMPTY
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
CSS1H
DGND
CN14(B8B-PH-K-S)
1
24V
2
/PCS1H
3
DGND
4
/PIN
5
5V
6
/PAP1H
7
N.C
8
/LUD1H
6
8
/LUM1H
PGND
3
4
24V
PSRSOL/
2
1
32
34
35
36
5V
PPSEN
DGND
DGND
/PCL1H
24V
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
10
12
14
HPTRAY1
DGND
HPTRAY2
DGND
HPSIZE1
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
HPSIZE2
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
3.3V
HPWS
DGND
DGND
DUP2SEN
5V(PULL UP)
CN15(B36B-PUDSS-1)
5
24V
7
/HPSOL
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
BU03P-TR-P-H
DGND
DUP2SEN
PULL UP
3
2
1
PHNR-3-H
PHNR-5-H
1
2
3
4
5
BU05P-TR-P-H
HPEMPTY
DGND
PULL UP
CSS1H
DGND
5
4
3
2
1
PHNR-5-H
SMP-02V-BC BLACK SMR-02V-B

1
1
/PCL1H
2
2
24V
SMP-03V-NC
SMR-03V-N
1
1
24V
2
2
N.C
3
3
/PSRSOL
1
2
3
PHNR-3-H
HARNESS GUIDE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4
3
2
1
MAIN FRAME
PHNR-15-H
PHNR-4-H
BU04P-TR-P-H
/HPIN
N.C
DGND
PULL UP
PHNR-4-H
1
2
3
4
PHNR-15-H
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BU15P-TR-P-H
24V
/HPSOL
HPTRAY1
DGND
HPTRAY2
DGND
HPSIZE1
DGND
PULL UP
HPSIZE2
DGND
PULL UP
3.3V
HPWS
DGND
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
DGND
/PIN
5V
/PAP1H
N.C
/LUD1H
B 6B-PH-K-S
SMR-02V-N
SMP-02V-NC
1
1
24V
2
2
/PCS1H
<PAPER PATH SENSOR>

<PAPER EMPTY SENSOR>
<PAPER UPPER LIMIT SENSOR>
<TRAY SENSOR PWB>
<PAPER FEED SOLENOID>
<CASETTE SENSOR SW (TRAY DETECTION)>
[1st TRAY UNIT]
<HAND PAPER
EMPTY SENSOR PWB>
VHPSG2481++-1
<HAND PAPER IN
SENSOR PWB>
VHPSG2481++-1
292250-3
1
/HPEMPTY
2
DGND
3
PULL UP
292250-3
1
/HPIN
2
DGND
3
PULL UP
[LIFT UP MOTOR UNIT]
<PAPER FEED CLUCH>
/LUM1H
N.C
PGND
B 3B-PH-K-S
<DUPLEX 2 SENSOR PWB>
<PAPER STOP ROLLER CLUCH>
DGND
DUP2SEN
PULL UP
<HAND PAPER WIDTH SENSOR>
<HAND PAPER SIZE SENSOR 2>
<HAND PAPER PICK SIZE SENSOR 1>
<HAND PAPER TRAY 2>
<HAND PAPER TRAY 1>
LIFT UP MOTORUN PLATE
1
2
3
S 3B-PH-K-S
3.3V
HPWS
DGND
292250-2
1
CSS1H
2
DGND
1
2
3
S 3B-PH-K-S
292250-3
1
HPSIZE2
2
DGND
3
PULL UP
292250-3
1
HPSIZE1
2
DGND
3
PULL UP
292250-2
1
HPTRAY2
2
DGND
292250-2
1
HPTRAY1
2
DGND
<HAND PAPER
SOLENOID>
[HAND PAPER (MANUAL FEED) UNIT]

SMP-02V-NC
SMR-02V-N
1
1
24V
2
2
/HPSOL
C. Manual feed, 1st tray unit section (P3)

[1st TRAY UNIT]
CN38(B28B-PUDSS-1)
1
PGND
2
24V
3
5V
4
24V
5
PCS1A#
6
LUM1A#
7
TRCLA#
8
PCL1A#
9
PCS2#
10
LUM2#
11
PCL2#
12
Y1B
13
LUM1B#
14
Y2
15
CSSELA#
16
TRCLB#
17
CSSELB#
18
PCS1B#
19
CSSELC#
20
PCL1B#
21
AI#
22
BI#
23
/AI#
24
/BI#
25
Y1A
26
OPCASSEL#
27
DGND
28
DGND
CN5(B28B-PUDSS-1)
1
PGND
2
24V
3
5V
4
24V
5
PCS2#
6
LUM2#
7
TRCL2#
8
PCL2#
9
PCS4#
10
LUM4#
11
PCL4#
12
Y3
13
LUM3#
14
Y4
15
CSSELA#
16
TRCL3#
17
CSSELB#
18
PCS3#
19
CSSELC#
20
PCL3#
21
AI#
22
BI#
23
/AI#
24
/BI#
25
Y2
26
OPCASSEL#
27
DGND
28
DGND
CN9(B24B-PUDSS-1)
1
PGND
2
24V
3
5V
4
24V
5
LUM4#
6
PCS4#
7
Y3
8
PCL4#
9
Y4
10
LUM3#
11
TRCL3#
12
CSSELA#
13
PCS3#
14
CSSELB#
15
PCL3#
16
CSSELC#
17
BI#
18
AI#
19
/BI#
20
/AI#
21
OPCASSEL#
22
DGND
23
DGND
24
DGND
Standard Tray I/F PWB
MCU PWB
D. 2nd tray unit section (P4)
To P9 Option Tray I/F PWB
[2nd TRAY UNIT]

CN3(B3B-PH-K-S)
/PCL2
N.C
24V
1
2
3
CN2(B3B-PH-K-K) Black
1
/TRCL2
2
N.C
3
24V
<PAPER FEED CL>
<VERTICAL TRANSPORT ROLLER CL>
(N.C)
TRAY SENSOR PWB

CN8(B8B-PH-K-S)
DGND
PPD2
5V
PAP2
DRS2
LUD2
/PCS2
24V
B 6B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN7(B3B-PH-K-E) Blue
1
CSS2
2
N.C
3
DGND
CN1(B3B-PH-K-R) Red
1
LUM2D
2
N.C
3
PGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
B 3B-PH-K-S
DGND
PPD2
5V
PAP2
DRS2
LUD2
DRS2
N.C
DGND
1
2
3
292250-2
1
DRS2
2
D-GND
<PAPER PATH SENSOR>

<PAPER EMPTY SENSOR>
<PAPER UPPER LIMIT SENSOR>
SMR-02V-N
SMP-02V-NC
1
1
/PCS2
<PAPER
2
2
24V
292250-2
1
CSS2
2
DGND
FEED SL>
<TRAY SENSOR SW>
B 3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
LUM2D
N.C
PGND
<DOOR OPEN/CLOSE
SENSOR SW>
[LIFT UP MOTOR UNIT]
THERMOSTAT 2
RHNR-4-H
4
3
2
1
RHNR-3-H
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
VLP-03V
VLR-03V
1
1
LIVE2
2
N.C
2
HL-OUTPUT2
3
3
VLP-02V
VLR-02V
LIVE1
1
1
2
HL-OUTPUT1
2
HARNESS GUIDE
HEATER LAMP 2 (SIDE)
BU04P-TR-P-H
RTH1
DGND
RTH2
DGND
BU03P-TR-P-H
5V(PullUp)
DGND
PDPX
CN6(B2P3-VH)
1
HL-OUTPUT1
2
N.C
3
HL-OUTPUT2
CN5(B2P-VL)
LIVE1
1
2
LIVE2
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
1
2
3
CN3(B03P-VL-B)
AC-LIVE IN
N.C
AC-NEUT IN
FGND
CN1(B03P-VL)
LIVE
N.C
NEUTRAL
FGND
CN1(B03P-VL)
LIVE
N.C
NEUTRAL
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN102(B3B-PH-K-S)
1
/PSFAN
2
N.C
3
GND
3
2
1
CN2(B03P-VL-R)
AC-NEUT OUT
N.C
AC-LIVE OUT
CN401(B2P-VH_RD_Red)
1
DVBS
2
GND
CN301(B2P-VH_BK_Black)
1
DHV
2
N.C
#187(B201)[WH]
THV
CN101(B2P-VH_White)
1
GB
2
N.C
CN21(B2P-VH_BL_Blue)
1
MCCASE
2
N.C
#187(B1)[RD]
MHV
LVPS PWB (1/2)
LVPS PWB (2/2)
CN101(B30B-PNDZS-1)
1
+12V
3
Sub3.3V
5
+3.3V
7
+3.3V
9
+5V
11
D-GND
13
D-GND
19
D-GND
21
+24V
23
P-GND
25
/PR
27
FW
29
P-OFF
2
Sub5V
4
Sub3.3V
6
+3.3V
8
+5V
10
D-GND
12
D-GND
14
D-GND
16
D-GND
18
+24VINT
20
+24VINT
22
P-GND
28
HLOUT2
30
HLOUT1
15
D-GND
17
D-GND
24
P-GND
26
FAN-C
CN1(B11B-PH-K-S)
9
DGND
11
SW24V
3
TCDA#
4
DHVREM
6
THV-REM
8
DVBSPWM
1
MHVREM
5
THVREM
2
GBPWM
7
DVBSREM
10
N.C
CN20(B10B-PH-K-S)
1
24VOP
2
24VOP
3
24VOP
4
+3.3V
5
+5V
6
D-GND
7
D-GND
8
P-GND
9
P-GND
10
P-GND
HV PWB
HEATER LAMP 1 (CENTER)
THERMOSTAT 1
THERMISTER 2
RHNR-4-H
1
2
3
4
RHNR-3-H
1
2
3
MCU PWB
THERMISTER 1
292250-3
5V(PullUp)
3
DGND
2
PDPX
1
DGND
RTH2
DGND
RTH1
PDPX
DGND
5V(PullUp)
<DUPLEX PAPER OUT SENSOR>
[FUSING UNIT]
CN19(S7B-PH-K-S)
CN10(B30B-PUDSS-1)
11
24V1
5
P-GND
14
D-GND
16
D-GND
21
+12V
28
3.3Vsub
22
+3.3V
20
+3.3V
18
+5V
30
D-GND
26
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
+24V
8
P-GND
9
/PR
13
FW
15
POFFR#
25
5Vsub
27
3.3Vsub
24
+3.3V
17
+5V
29
D-GND
23
D-GND
19
D-GND
1
D-GND
6
+24VINT
4
+24VINT
7
P-GND
12
HLOUT2
10
HLOUT1
CN12(B10B-PASK-1)
1
DGND
2
SW24V
3
TCDA#
4
DHVREM/
5
THV-REM/
6
DVBSPWM/
7
MHVREM/
8
THVREM
9
GBPWM/
10
DVBSREM/
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
[POWER SUPPLY UNIT]
White
Brown
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
White
Black
Black
White
(To P06)
SOKET
172076-7(RED)
or
PS-250-R(RED)
SW IN (NEUTRAL)
SW IN (LIVE)
SW OUT (LIVE)
<AC SW>
TC HIGH VOLTAGE
HOLDER
MCCASE
SW OUT (NEUTRAL)
172076-1
or
PS-250
DHV
THV
GB
MHV
E. Fusing unit, Power supply unit section (P5)
PM PWB
BPC
APC
/PMCLK
/PMRDY
/PMD
PGND
24V
177622-5
DGND
/SYNC
SW5V
B3B-PH-K-S
SW5V
/SYNC
/VIDEO
/SAMP
APCSTT#
DGND
LPSEL
SW5V
/SYNC
DGND
B10B-PH-K-S
LSU UNIT
2
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
3
2
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
2
1
(TSHP-04V-K)
CRUM PWB
TCS
4
3
2
1
51010-0811
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P05
(To HV PWB)
DGND
TRAY PAPER
PULL UP
BU03P-TR-P-H
PHNR-3-H
1
2
3
SW5V
/PMRDY
/VIDEO
/SAMP
APCSTT
DGND
LPSEL
/PMCLK
/SYNC
/PMD
PGND
24V
BU12P-TR-P-H
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PHNR-12-H
(THSR-04V-K)
DGND
5V
DEVCLK#
DEVID#
52025-0811
8
DVBS
7
N.C
6
DGND
5
DEV
4
N.C
3
N.C
2
TONER
1
24V
PHNR-3-H
3
2
1
SMR-03V-N
SMP-03V-NC
1
1
/PSFANOUT
3
3
PSFANRDY
2
2
PGND
SMR-03V-N
SMP-03V-NC
1
1
/PSFANOUT
3
3
PSFANRDY
2
2
PGND
<PAPER EXIT TRAY UNIT>
<PAPER EXIT TRAY SENSOR>
GP1S73P
DGND
TRAY PAPER
PULL UP
<PS FAN 2 (FRONT)>
<PS FAN 1 (SIDE)>
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PHNR-12-H
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
/PSFANOUT
PSFANRDY
PGND
DGND
DEV
TONER
24V
DGND
5V
DEVCLK#
DEVID#
CN501(B13B-PASK-1)
1
SW5V
2
DGND
3
/PMRDY
4
/VIDEO
5
/SAMP
6
APCSTT
7
DGND
8
LPSEL
9
/PMCLK
10
/SYNC
11
/PMD
12
PGND
13
24V
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
CN502(B14B-PUDSS-1)
10
OZNFANOUT
12
OZNFANRDY
14
PGND
13
DGND
11
TRAY PAPER
9
5V(PULL UP)
3
2
1
CN29(B6B-PH-K-S)
6
/PSFANOUT
5
PSFANRDY
4
PGND
1
2
CN3(B2P-VH)
TMD
/TMD
1
2
3
(N.C)
CN503(B4B-PH-K-S)
1
5V
2
EHUD#
3
DGND
4
ERTH
CN11(B4B-PH-K-K)BLACK
1
24V
2
/PREMSOL
3
N.C
(N.C)
4
DGND
(N.C)
CN18(B03P-VH)
24VINT
PGND
SW24V
CN504(B06B-CZHK-B-1)
6
/POUTFANOUT
POUTFANRDY
5
4
PGND
3
/POUTFANOUT
POUTFANRDY
2
1
PGND
5
4
3
2
1
CN8(B5B-PH-K-S)
SW24V
PGND
/MMD
/MMRDY
/MMCLK
1
2
3
4
5V
EHUD#
DGND
ERTH
(S4B-ZR-SM3A-TF)
SMP-02V-NC
1
24V
2
DGND
SMP-03V-NC
1
24VINT
2
N.C
3
SW24V
CK03-6H-P
3
POUTFANOUT
2
POUTFANRDY
1
PGND
SMR-02V-N
1
2
SMR-03V-N
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
ILSW
<INTERLOCK SW>
<SEPARATION PAWL SOLENOID>
Soldering
24VINT
Soldering
SW24V
<POUT FAN 2>
<POUT FAN 1>
<TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR>
31 CPM model only

CK03-6H-P
3
POUTFANOUT
2
POUTFANRDY
1
PGND
<TONNER MOTOR>
<MAIN MOTOR>
(B5B-PH-K-S)
1
SW24V
2
PGND
3
/MMD
4
/MMRDY
5
/MMCLK
F. DV & LSU unit section (P6)
MCU PWB
IMC PWB
SRA-21T-3
CN7(B4B-PH-K-S)
1
TX+
2
RX+
3
RXTX4
CN9(B3B-PH-K-S)
1
SP+
2
SP3
N.C
HANDSET
CN8(B2B-PH-K-S)
RHS1
GND
2
SPEAKER
CN**(TX24-60R-12ST-H1)
24V
1
24V
2
5V
3
5V
4
3.3V
5
3.3V
6
/RESET
7
/PWOFF
8
/PRLINE
9
/HSYNC
10
GND
11
GND
12
13 /FAXPAGE
FAXCMD
14
15 /FAXCRDY
GND
16
GDATA0
17
GDATA2
18
GDATA4
19
GDATA6
20
GDATA8
21
GDATA10
22
GDATA12
23
GDATA14
24
GND
25
/FAXPRD
26
27 /FAXACK1P
GND
28
29 /FAXACK0P
GND
30
24V
31
24V
32
5V
33
5Vsub
34
3.3V
35
3.3V
36
EXTRS
37
38
FAXWU
39
/SCLINE
/READY
40
GND
41
42
GND
43
/FAXDET
44
FAXSTS
45 /FAXSRDY
GND
46
GDATA1
47
GDATA3
48
GDATA5
49
GDATA7
50
GDATA9
51
GDATA11
52
GDATA13
53
GDATA15
54
GND
55
56 /FAXREQ1P
57 /FAXCS1P
58 /FAXREQ0P
59 /FAXCS0P
GND
60
Board to Board Connector
CN7(TX25-60P-12ST-H1E)
5V
1
5V
2
3.3V
3
3.3V
4
/MRESET
5
/PWOFF
6
/PRLINE
7
/HSYNC
8
DGND
9
10
DGND
11
DGND
12
N.C
13
/ESPAGE
14
ESCMD
15
/ESCRDY
16
DGND
17
GDATA0
18
GDATA2
GDATA4
19
GDATA6
20
21
GDATA8
GDATA10
22
23
GDATA12
GDATA14
24
25
N.C
/ESACK1P 26
27
N.C
28
/ESPRD
/ESACK0P 29
30
DGND
31
5V
32
5V
3.3V
33
3.3V
34
35
N.C
N.C
36
/SCLINE
37
/READY
38
39
DGND
40
DGND
41
DGND
42
N.C
43
/ESDET
44
ESSTS
45
/ESSRDY
46
DGND
47
GDATA1
48
GDATA3
GDATA5
49
GDATA7
50
51
GDATA9
52
GDATA11
53
GDATA13
54
GDATA15
55
N.C
/ESREQ1P 56
57
/ESCS1P
/ESREQ0P 58
59
/ESCS0P
60
DGND
MCU PWB
CN5(TX25-60R-12ST-H1E)
3.3VSub
1
3.3VSub
2
24V
3
DGND
4
DGND
5
/SCLINE
6
/READY
7
5V
8
GDATA1
9
GDATA3
10
GDATA5
11
GDATA7
12
GDATA9
13
GDATA11
14
GDATA13
15
GDATA15
16
17 /PRINTERWU
/PCLDET
18
PCLSTS
19
20 /PCLSRDY
21 /PCLREQ1P
22 /PCLCS1P
23 /PCLREQ0P
24 /PCLCS0P
/FAXDET
25
FAXSTS
26
27 /FAXSRDY
28 /FAXREQ0P
29 /FAXCS0P
3.3V
30
5Vsub
31
EXTRS
32
GND
33
GND
34
/MRESET
35
/PWOFF
36
/PRLINE
37
/HSYNC
38
/PSSTS
39
GDATA0
40
GDATA2
41
GDATA4
42
GDATA6
43
GDATA8
44
GDATA10
45
GDATA12
46
GDATA14
47
/FAXWU
48
/GDIDET
49
PCLCMD
50
51 /PCLCRDY
/PCLPRD
52
53 /PCLACK1P
54 /PCLACK0P
55 /FAXPAGE
FAXCMD
56
57 /FAXCRDY
/FAXPRD
58
59 /FAXACK0P
3.3V
60
FAX PWB
CN1(TX25-60P-12ST-H1)
1
24V
2
24V
3
5V
4
5V
5
3.3V
6
3.3V
7
/RESET
8
/PWOFF
9
/PRLINE
10
/HSYNC
11
GND
12
GND
/FAXPAGE 13
14
FAXCMD
/FAXCRDY 15
16
GND
17
GDATA0
18
GDATA2
19
GDATA4
20
GDATA6
21
GDATA8
GDATA10
22
GDATA12
23
GDATA14
24
GND
25
/FAXPRD
26
/FAXACK1P 27
28
GND
/FAXACK0P 29
30
GND
31
24V
32
24V
33
5V
34
5Vsub
3.3V
35
3.3V
36
EXTRS
37
FAXWU
38
/SCLINE
39
/READY
40
GND
41
GND
42
/FAXDET
43
44
FAXSTS
/FAXSRDY 45
46
GND
47
GDATA1
48
GDATA3
49
GDATA5
50
GDATA7
51
GDATA9
GDATA11
52
GDATA13
53
GDATA15
54
GND
55
/FAXREQ1P 56
/FAXCS1P 57
/FAXREQ0P 58
/FAXCS0P 59
60
GND
MOTHER PWB
CN**(TX25-60P-12ST-H1)
1
5Vsub
2
5Vsub
3
3.3Vsub
4
3.3Vsub
5
/RESET
6
/PWOFF
7
/PRLINE
8
/HSYNC
9
GND
10
GND
11
GND
12
GND
13 /PCLPAGE
PCLCMD
14
15 /PCLCRDY
16
GND
17
GDATA0
18
GDATA2
GDATA4
19
GDATA6
20
21
GDATA8
GDATA10
22
GDATA12
23
GDATA14
24
GND
25
/PCLPRD
26
27 /PCLACK1P
GND
28
29 /PCLACK0P
GND
30
5Vsub
31
5Vsub
32
3.3Vsub
33
3.3V
34
35 /PRINTWU
PSSTS
36
/SCLINE
37
/READY
38
GND
39
GND
40
GND
41
NC
42
/PCLDET
43
PCLSTS
44
45 /PCLSRDY
GND
46
GDATA1
47
GDATA3
48
GDATA5
49
GDATA7
50
GDATA9
51
GDATA11
52
GDATA13
53
GDATA15
54
GND
55
56 /PCLREQ1P
57 /PCLCS1P
58 /PCLREQ0P
59 /PCLCS0P
GND
60
CN3(TX24-60R-12ST-H1)
3.3VSub
1
3.3VSub
2
24V
3
DGND
4
DGND
5
/SCLINE
6
/READY
7
5V
8
GDATA1
9
GDATA3
10
GDATA5
11
GDATA7
12
GDATA9
13
14
GDATA11
15
GDATA13
16
GDATA15
/PRINTERWU 17
18
/PCLDET
PCLSTS 19
/PCLSRDY 20
/PCLREQ1P 21
/PCLCS1P 22
/PCLREQ0P 23
/PCLCS0P
24
/FAXDET
25
FAXSTS
26
/FAXSRDY 27
/FAXREQ0P 28
/FAXCS0P 29
3.3V
30
5Vsub
31
EXTRS
32
GND
33
GND
34
/MRESET
35
/PWOFF
36
/PRLINE
37
/HSYNC
38
/PSSTS
39
GDATA0
40
GDATA2
41
GDATA4
42
GDATA6
43
GDATA8
44
GDATA10
45
GDATA12
46
GDATA14
47
/FAXWU
48
/GDIDET
49
PCLCMD
50
/PCLCRDY 51
/PCLPRD
52
/PCLACK1P 53
/PCLACK0P 54
/FAXPAGE 55
FAXCMD
56
/FAXCRDY 57
/FAXPRD
58
/FAXACK0P 59
3.3V
60
PCL PWB or SPLC PWB
G. Board to board section (1/2) (P7)
CN**(TX25-60P-12ST-H1)
1
5Vsub
2
5Vsub
3
3.3Vsub
4
3.3Vsub
5
/RESET
6
/PWOFF
7
/PRLINE
8
/HSYNC
9
GND
10
GND
11
GND
12
GND
13 /PCLPAGE
14
PCLCMD
15 /PCLCRDY
16
GND
17
GDATA0
18
GDATA2
19
GDATA4
20
GDATA6
21
GDATA8
22
GDATA10
23
GDATA12
24
GDATA14
25
GND
26
/PCLPRD
27 /PCLACK1P
GND
28
29 /PCLACK0P
GND
30
5Vsub
31
5Vsub
32
3.3Vsub
33
3.3V
34
35 /PRINTWU
36
PSSTS
37
/SCLINE
38
/READY
39
GND
40
GND
41
GND
42
NC
43
/PCLDET
PCLSTS
44
45 /PCLSRDY
46
GND
GDATA1
47
GDATA3
48
GDATA5
49
GDATA7
50
GDATA9
51
GDATA11
52
GDATA13
53
54
GDATA15
55
GND
56 /PCLREQ1P
57 /PCLCS1P
58 /PCLREQ0P
59 /PCLCS0P
60
GND
MOTHER PWB
CN9(TX24-60R-12ST-H1E)
1
+5V
2
+5V
3
+3.3V
4
+3.3V
5
RESET_
6
PWOFF_
7
PRLINE_
HSYNC_
8
GND
9
10
GND
11
GND
12
GND
PCLPAGE_ 13
14
PCLCMD
PCLCRDY_ 15
16
GND
17
DATA0
18
DATA2
19
DATA4
20
DATA6
21
DATA8
22
DATA10
23
DATA12
24
DATA14
25
GND
26
PCLPRD
PCLACK1P_ 27
28
GND
PCLACK0P_ 29
30
GND
31
+5V
32
+5V
33
+3.3V
+3.3VMAIN 34
PRINTWU_ 35
36
PSSTS
37
SCLINE_
38
READY_
39
GND
GND
40
GND
41
42
NC
PCLDETECT_ 43
PCLSTS
44
PCLSRDY_ 45
GND
46
DATA1
47
DATA3
48
DATA5
49
DATA7
50
DATA9
51
DATA11
52
DATA13
53
DATA15
54
GND
55
PCLREQ1P_ 56
PCLCS1P_ 57
PCLREQ0P_ 58
PCLCS0P_ 59
60
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
CN3(TX25-100P-12ST-H1E) (Japan only)

1
+5V
2
+5V
3
PCIRST_
4
GND
5
GND
6
GND
7
GND
8
GND
9
GNT2_
10
REQ2_
11
GNT4_
12
REQ4_
13
GND
14
GND
15
PCIAD30
16
PCIAD28
17
PCIAD26
18
PCIAD24
19
GND
20
GND
21
PCIAD22
22
PCIAD20
23
PCIAD18
24
PCIAD16
25
GND
26
GND
27
IRDY_
28
DEVSEL_
29
LOCK_
30
SERR_
31
+3.3V
32
+3.3V
33
+3.3V
34
+3.3V
35
GND
36
GND
37
GND
38
GND
39
PCIAD14
40
PCIAD12
41
PCIAD10
42
PCIAD8
43
GND
44
GND
45
PCIAD6
46
PCIAD4
47
PCIAD2
48
PCIAD0
49
+5V
50
+5V
51
+5V
52
+5V
53
INTA_
54
INTB_
55
PCICLK1
56
PCICLK2
PCICLK3
57
PCICLK4
58
GNT1_
59
REQ1_
60
GNT3_
61
REQ3_
62
GND
63
GND
64
PCIAD31
65
66
PCIAD29
PCIAD27
67
PCIAD25
68
C/BE3
69
NC
70
PCIAD23
71
PCIAD21
72
PCIAD19
73
PCIAD17
74
C/BE2
75
IDSEL
76
FRAME_
77
TRDY_
78
STOP_
79
PERR_
80
+3.3V
81
+3.3V
82
+3.3V
83
+3.3V
84
GND
85
GND
86
PAR
87
C/BE1
88
PCIAD15
89
PCIAD13
90
PCIAD11
91
PCIAD9
92
C/BE0
93
NC
94
PCIAD7
95
PCIAD5
96
97
PCIAD3
98
PCIAD1
99
+5V
100
+5V
+5V
+5V
+3.3V
+3.3V
RESET_
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
GND
GND
GND
GND
(GND)
PCLCMD
PCLCRDY_
GND
DATA0
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
DATA8
DATA10
DATA12
DATA14
GND
(NC)
PCLACK1P_
GND
PCLACK0P_
GND
+5V
+5V
+3.3V
+3.3VMAIN
PRINTWU_
PSSTS
(NC)
READY_
GND
GND
GND
(GND)
PCLDETECT_
PCLSTS
PCLSRDY_
GND
DATA1
DATA3
DATA5
DATA7
DATA9
DATA11
DATA13
DATA15
GND
PCLREQ1P_
PCLCS1P_
PCLREQ0P_
PCLCS0P_
GND
CN1(TX24-100R-12ST-H1)
1
+5V
2
+5V
3
PCIRST_
4
GND
5
GND
6
GND
7
GND
8
GND
GNT2_
9
REQ2_
10
GNT4_
11
REQ4_
12
GND
13
GND
14
PCIAD30
15
PCIAD28
16
PCIAD26
17
PCIAD24
18
GND
19
GND
20
PCIAD22
21
PCIAD20
22
PCIAD18
23
PCIAD16
24
GND
25
GND
26
IRDY_
27
DEVSEL_
28
LOCK_
29
SERR_
30
+3.3V
31
+3.3V
32
+3.3V
33
+3.3V
34
GND
35
GND
36
GND
37
GND
38
PCIAD14
39
PCIAD12
40
PCIAD10
41
PCIAD8
42
GND
43
GND
44
PCIAD6
45
PCIAD4
46
PCIAD2
47
PCIAD0
48
+5V
49
+5V
50
+5V
51
+5V
52
INTA_
53
INTB_
54
PCICLK1
55
PCICLK2
56
PCICLK3
57
PCICLK4
58
GNT1_
59
REQ1_
60
GNT3_
61
REQ3_
62
GND
63
GND
64
65
PCIAD31
66
PCIAD29
67
PCIAD27
68
PCIAD25
69
C/BE3
70
NC
71
PCIAD23
72
PCIAD21
73
PCIAD19
74
PCIAD17
75
C/BE2
76
IDSEL
77
FRAME_
78
TRDY_
79
STOP_
80
PERR_
81
+3.3V
82
+3.3V
83
+3.3V
84
+3.3V
85
GND
86
GND
87
PAR
88
C/BE1
89
PCIAD15
90
PCIAD13
91
PCIAD11
92
PCIAD9
93
C/BE0
94
NC
95
PCIAD7
96
PCIAD5
97
PCIAD3
98
PCIAD1
99
+5V
100
+5V
PCL PWB
USB HOST PWB (Japan only)
SPLC PWB
H. Board to board section (2/2) (P8)
CN3(TX24-60R-12ST-H1)
1
3.3VSub
2
3.3VSub
24V
3
4
DGND
5
DGND
6
/SCLINE
7
/READY
5V
8
GDATA1
9
GDATA3
10
GDATA5
11
GDATA7
12
13
GDATA9
14
GDATA11
GDATA13
15
GDATA15
16
/PRINTERWU 17
/PCLDET
18
PCLSTS
19
/PCLSRDY 20
/PCLREQ1P 21
/PCLCS1P 22
/PCLREQ0P 23
/PCLCS0P 24
/FAXDET
25
FAXSTS
26
/FAXSRDY 27
/FAXREQ0P 28
/FAXCS0P 29
3.3V
30
5Vsub
31
EXTRS
32
GND
33
GND
34
/MRESET
35
/PWOFF
36
/PRLINE
37
/HSYNC
38
/PSSTS
39
GDATA0
40
GDATA2
41
GDATA4
42
GDATA6
43
GDATA8
44
GDATA10
45
GDATA12
46
GDATA14
47
/FAXWU
48
/GDIDET
49
PCLCMD
50
/PCLCRDY 51
/PCLPRD
52
/PCLACK1P 53
/PCLACK0P 54
/FAXPAGE 55
FAXCMD
56
/FAXCRDY 57
/FAXPRD
58
/FAXACK0P 59
3.3V
60
CN1(TX25-60P-12ST-H1)
24V
1
24V
2
5V
3
5V
4
3.3V
5
3.3V
6
/RESET
7
/PWOFF
8
/PRLINE
9
/HSYNC
10
GND
11
GND
12
/FAXPAGE 13
FAXCMD
14
/FAXCRDY 15
GND
16
GDATA0
17
GDATA2
18
GDATA4
19
GDATA6
20
GDATA8
21
GDATA10
22
GDATA12
23
GDATA14
24
GND
25
/FAXPRD
26
/FAXACK1P 27
GND
28
/FAXACK0P 29
GND
30
24V
31
24V
32
5V
33
5Vsub
34
3.3V
35
3.3V
36
EXTRS
37
FAXWU
38
/SCLINE
39
/READY
40
GND
41
GND
42
/FAXDET
43
FAXSTS
44
/FAXSRDY 45
GND
46
GDATA1
47
GDATA3
48
GDATA5
49
GDATA7
50
GDATA9
51
GDATA11
52
GDATA13
53
GDATA15
54
GND
55
/FAXREQ1P 56
/FAXCS1P 57
/FAXREQ0P 58
/FAXCS0P 59
GND
60
3. Signal list
Signal name
Name
Function/Operation
CL
Copy lamp
CLH
RSPF clutch
COVER
CSS1
RSPF cover open/close

detection
Tray 1 installation detection
CSS2
CSS3
CSS4
DPX
Duplex motor
DRS2
DUP2SEN
Door open/close detection

(Tray 2)
(Tray 3)
(Tray 4)
DUP2 paper delivery sensor
EHUD
Controls ON/OFF of the

copy lamp.
RSPF paper feed roller.
Detects open/close of
the RSPF cover.
Detects installation of
tray 1.
tray 2.
tray 3.
tray 4.
Controls the duplex
motor.
Detects door open/close.
Connector level
L
H
ON
OFF
Connector
No.
CN26
Pin No.
PWB name
MCU
RSPF
interface
RSPF
interface
MCU
ON
OFF
CN5
13
OPEN
CLOSE
CN5
NO
YES
CN15
22
NO
YES
CN7
NO
YES
CN7
NO
YES
CN4
CN1
2,3,4,5
OPEN
CLOSE
CN8
OPEN
CLOSE
CN8
OPEN
CLOSE
CN4
YES
NO
CN15
12
Humidity sensor
Detects paper delivery in

the reverse path.
Senses the humidity.
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
CN503
MCU
ERTH
Temperature sensor
Senses the temperature.
CN503
MCU
GSOL
Gate solenoid
ON
OFF
CN4
HLOUT1
Heater lamp main
OFF
ON
CN10
10
RSPF
interface
MCU
HLOUT2
Heater lamp sub
OFF
ON
CN10
12
MCU
HPEMPTY
Manual feed paper presence

detection
YES
NO
CN15
16
MCU
HPIN
Manual feed paper entry

detection
detection
Manual feed paper size
detection
(Longitudinal direction)
Manual paper feed solenoid
Reverses the paper exit

gate in ON operation.
Turns ON/OFF the
heater lamp main.
Turns ON/OFF the
heater lamp sub.
Detects presence of
paper for manual paper
feed.
Detects paper entry for
manual feed.
Detects the length of
manual feed paper.
Detects the size of
manual feed paper.
(longitudinal direction)
Controls the manual
paper feed solenoid.
manual feed tray paper.
manual feed tray paper.
Detects the width of
manual feed paper.
Drives the right paper
exit gate solenoid.
Detects the upper limit of
the lift-up motor.
the lift-up motor.
the lift-up motor.
the lift-up motor.
Drives the lift plate of the
paper tray.
NO
YES
CN15
26
MCU
NO
YES
CN15
17
MCU
NO
YES
CN15
23
MCU
ON
OFF
CN15
MCU
LONG
SHORT
CN15
MCU
SHORT
LONG
CN15
13
MCU
CN15
31
MCU
ON
OFF
CN17
8,9
MCU
Not
detected
Not
detected
Not
detected
Not
detected
OFF
Detected
CN14
MCU
Detected
CN8
Detected
CN8
Detected
CN4
ON
CN15
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
DRS3
DRS4
HPSIZE1
HPSIZE2
HPSOL
HPTRAY1
HPTRAY2
HPWS
KEEPSOL
LUD1H
LUD2
LUD3
LUD4
LUM1H

length detection
length detection
Manual feed paper width
detection
Right paper exit gate
solenoid
Lift-up motor upper limit
detection
detection (Tray 2)
detection (Tray 3)
detection (Tray 4)
Lift-up motor
NOTE
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Signal name
Name
Function/Operation
LUM2D
Lift-up motor

paper tray.
paper tray.
paper tray.
Corrects the initial
position of the scanner.
LUM3D
Lift-up motor
LUM4D
Lift-up motor
MHP
Mirror home position sensor
MIRMOD
Mirror motor
MMD
MMRDY
Main motor
Main motor lock
OCCOVER
OZNFANOUT
PAP1H
PAP2
OC cover open/close
detection
Ozone fan
Paper pass sensor (Tray 1)
Controls the mirror

operation.
Controls the main motor.
Detects lock of the main
motor.
the OC cover.
Controls the ozone fan.
Detects paper pass.
Detects paper pass.
PAP3
PAP4
Connector level
L
H
OFF
ON
Connector
No.
CN1
Pin No.
1
PWB name
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
OFF
ON
CN1
OFF
ON
CN4
14
Other
than
home
position.
Home
position
CN23
33
CN906
1,2,3,4
ON
Rotation
OFF
Lock
IC215
IC215
3
2
MCU
MCU
OPEN
CLOSE
CN23
29
MCU
OFF
YES
YES
ON
NO
NO
CN502
CN14
CN8
10
6
4
Detects paper pass.
YES
NO
CN8
Detects paper pass.
YES
NO
CN4
PAPER
Paper entry sensor
Detects paper entry.
YES
NO
CN5
18
PCL1H
Paper feed clutch (Tray 1)
ON
OFF
CN15
PCL2
ON
OFF
CN3
PCL3
ON
OFF
CN3
PCL4
ON
OFF
CN4
10
PCS1H
Paper feed solenoid (Tray 1)
ON
OFF
CN14
PCS2
ON
OFF
CN8
PCS3
ON
OFF
CN8
PCS4
ON
OFF
CN4
12
PDPX
Duplex sensor
YES
NO
CN19
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
PFULL2
No. 2 paper exit full sensor
YES
NO
CN21
MCU
PFULL2_R
Right paper exit full sensor
YES
NO
CN17
MCU
PGSOL
Paper exit gate solenoid
ON
OFF
CN22
2,3
MCU
PIN
POUT1
Paper entry sensor

No. 1 paper exit sensor
YES
NO
NO
YES
CN14
CN32
4
6
MCU
MCU
POUT2
No. 2 paper exit sensor
YES
NO
CN21
MCU
POUT2_R
Right paper exit sensor
YES
NO
CN17
MCU
POUTCOV
Paper exit cover open/close

detection
Paper exit cooling fan
Paper exit cooling fan lock
detection

paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
Detects paper presence
for duplex.
Detects paper full in the
No. 2 paper exit unit.
Detects paper full in the
right paper exit unit.
Controls the paper exit
gate.
Detects paper entry.
Detects paper exit of the
right paper exit unit.
the paper exit cover.
Cools the fusing unit.
Detects lock of the paper
exit cooling fan.
Detects paper pass.
MCU
MCU
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
SPF
interface
MCU
OPEN
CLOSE
CN21
10
MCU
OFF
Rotation
ON
Lock
CN504
CN504
3,6
2,5
MCU
MCU
YES
NO
CN8
POUTFANOUT
POUTFANRDY
PPD2
OP I/F PWB
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
Standard
tray I/F
NOTE
PPD3
Detects paper pass.
Connector level
L
H
YES
NO
PPD4
Detects paper pass.
YES
NO
CN4
PREMSOL
Paper separation solenoid
ON
OFF
CN11
PSFANOUT
PSFANRDY
PS fan
PS fan lock detection
OFF
Rotation
ON
Lock
CN29
CN29
3,6
2,5
MCU
MCU
PSOL
PS solenoid
ON
OFF
CN5
11
PSRSOL
RSOL
Resist roller solenoid

Reverse solenoid
Controls the paper

separation solenoid.
Drives the PS fan.
Detects lock of the PS
fan.
PS roller.
Controls the resist roller.
Reverses the paper exit
gate in ON operation.
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
CN15
CN5
4
15
RTH1
Thermister 1
CN19
SPF
interface
MCU
SPF
interface
PWB
MCU
RTH2
Thermister 2
CN19
MCU
SFTD
SFTHP
Shifter motor
Shifter home position sensor
Home
position
CN2
CN32
3,4,5,6
4
MCU
MCU
SPFOPEN
SPF cover open/close

sensor
SPF paper exit sensor
Other
than
home
position.
OPEN
CLOSE
CN5
24
YES
NO
CN3
CN2
OFF
Rotation
ON
Lock
CN32
CN32
10,12
14,16
CN3
CN502
1,2
6
ON
OFF
CN2
ON
OFF
CN2
YES
NO
CN5
Signal name
SPFOUT
SPFWS
Name
Function/Operation
TFANOUT
TFANRDY
SPF document width

detection
Fusing fan
Fusing fan lock detection
TMD
TONER
Toner motor
Toner sensor
TRCL2
Vertical transport clutch
TRCL3
Vertical transport clutch
W0
Paper empty sensor
Detects the fusing

temperature.
Detects the fusing
temperature.
Offsets paper.
Detects the home
position of the shifter.
the SPF cover.
SPF.
Detects SFP documents.
Drives the fusing fan.
Detects lock of the fusing
fan.
Controls the toner motor.
Detects the toner
density.
vertical transport roller.
vertical transport clutch.
Detects paper empty.
Connector
No.
CN8
Pin No.
2
PWB name
NOTE
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
SPF
interface
SPF
interface
SPF
interface
MCU
MCU
MCU
MCU
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
SPF
interface
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
COPYRIGHT 2009 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft Windows operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U. S.A. and other countries.
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003
and Internet Explorer are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987 -2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2009 August Printed in Japan

Sharp MX-m260 MX-m310 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp MX-m260 MX-m310 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp MX-m260 MX-m310 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main sections covered in the document?

What are the main sections covered in the document?

What components are described in the External View and Internal Structure section?

What components are described in the External View and Internal Structure section?

SERVICE MANUAL

NOTE FOR SERVICING

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING

1. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

1. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

2. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1

2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

3. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 31

4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE

NOTE FOR SERVICING

2. Precautions for servicing

1. Warning for servicing

3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may

It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

3. Note for installing site

4. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU

MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

Reversing single pass feeder

Job separator tray

Copier/Printer (SPLC) model

Copier/Printer (SPLC) model

Paper feed unit

Paper feed unit

FAX expantion kit

Expantion memory board

FAX memory (8MB)

Printer expantion kit

Barcode font kit

Flash ROM kit

PS3 expantion kit

MX-M260/M310/M260N/M310N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 - 1

2. Combination of options list

Main unit Model

Automatic document Document feeder

Standard for North America

Unavailable for North America

Paper feed system

Paper feed unit (500 x 2 sheets)

Job separator tray

Paper feed unit (500 sheets)

FAX expansion kit

FAX memory (8MB)

Printer expansion kit

PS3 expansion kit

Requires installation of the

Barcode font kit

Flash ROM kit

256MB expansion memory board

512MB expansion memory board